Harman Becker Automotive Systems BH10MYDIS Head Unit with Bluetooth User Manual 01 Cover Hyundai Logo

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1241982
Application ID	BFuWFw1UJA0ceCStOrd9hw==
Document Description	User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	277.78kB (3472215 bits)
Date Submitted	2010-02-16 00:00:00
Date Available	2010-04-02 00:00:00
Creation Date	2009-12-15 10:38:13
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2010-01-19 12:47:55
Document Title	01 Cover (Hyundai-Logo).fm
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document Author:	TDietz

01 Cover (Hyundai-Logo).fm Seite 1 Dienstag, 19. Januar 2010 11:35 11
We wish you much enjoyment with your
Driver Information System.
Please familiarize yourself with the Driver
Information System and read the user
manual before using the system. You will
thus be able to make better use of your
system and avoid endangering yourself
and others.
Please understand that actual road status
may be different from the map screens in
this manual due to future updates and
changes of the map content.
The colors on screen elements
represented in this manual may be different
from actual color on the display due to the
illumination from the printing ink.
Hyundai is constantly updating the system
to the latest technological standards and
therefore retains the right to implement
changes in design, equipment and
technology.
Table of contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapters in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Information about the laser used . . 14
Information about the operating
temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Function restrictions
when driving the vehicle. . . . . . . . . 15
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada (IC)
compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . 15
Bluetooth® information . . . . . . . . . 15
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Functional introduction. . . . . . . . . . .
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headunit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Central control panel . . . . . . . . . . .
Function buttons on the
steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
18
19
19
19
20
22
Menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Composition of the main menu . . . .
Calling up main functions . . . . . . . .
BACK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating example for the
FM main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to FM mode . . . . . . . . . . .
Top status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottom status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main menu, content area and
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviated list entries . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the system on . . . . . . . . .
Switching the system off . . . . . . . . .
Switching audio/video
playback on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to FM1/FM2 or AM mode
and switching radio band. . . . . . . . .
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
24
25
26
FM and AM mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HD Radio (TM) information . . . . . . . . . .
Licensing information. . . . . . . . . . . .
Availibilty information. . . . . . . . . . . .
What is HD RadioTM technology? . .
39
40
40
40
40
27
27
27
27
28
29
30
31
31
31
32
33
33
33
37
Multicasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HD RadioTM signal delay. . . . . . . . .
Automatic switching between
digital and analog broadcasting . . .
Text based information . . . . . . . . . .
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to FM or AM mode . . . . .
Switching mode/band . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a station via
the station list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a station via
a station search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a station via
manual tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a station via the presets .
Tuning to a station via
the Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing stations using the station
presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing stations using the
Tune & Seek menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing station details . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing details of the currently
tuned HD RadioTM station . . . . . . . .
40
40
41
41
42
42
43
44
44
44
45
46
47
47
49
49
50
51
51
Table of contents
Audio and FM/AM HD RadioTM
settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM HD RadioTM settings. . . . . . . . .
AM HD RadioTM setting . . . . . . . . .
XM Satellite Radio mode . . . . . . . . . .
XM Satellite Radio information/
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XM® Satellite Radio information . . .
General operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a channel using the
Tune & Seek menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a channel using the
channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a channel using the
Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a channel using the
channel list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning to a channel using the
category list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a channel using the
Tune & Seek menu. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing a channel using the
channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
52
54
55
56
56
57
58
58
58
59
60
61
61
63
63
63
64
Storing a channel using the
channel list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Storing a channel using the
category list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Closing the XM® Radio
settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting the display in the
upper status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Setting the category filter for the
channel list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Setting the category search . . . . . . . 68
Status screens and messages . . . . . . . 69
Status screen
Channel Not Authorized. . . . . . . . . . 69
Status screen No Signal . . . . . . . . . 69
Status screen Loading . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Status screen
Channel Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Status screen Check Antenna . . . . . 70
Status screen Channel Off Air . . . . . 71
DISC mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
License notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Automatic video lock-out . . . . . . . . . 74
Supported discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Permissible file systems . . . . . . . . . 75
Multisession CDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Mixed Mode CD/CD-Extra. . . . . . . . 75
MP3 or wma discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Note on copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Notes on discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Notes on the care of discs. . . . . . . . 78
Notes on playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Loading the disc changer magazine . . . 79
Safety instruction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Loading the first available empty
magazine compartment. . . . . . . . . . 79
Loading a specific empty magazine
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Loading all empty magazine
compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Ejecting the disc changer magazine . . . 82
Ejecting the magazine compartment
containing the last disc played . . . . 82
Ejecting a specific magazine
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Ejecting all magazine
compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Audio disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Switching to DISC mode and
playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
DISC main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Selecting and playing discs. . . . . . . 87
Table of contents
Pausing or resuming playback . . . . 88
Selecting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting folders and MP3 or
wma tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fast forwarding/reversing. . . . . . . . 89
Repeating tracks or folders . . . . . . 90
Random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Audio settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Video DVD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Video DVD playback conditions . . . 94
Functional restrictions . . . . . . . . . . 95
Switching to DISC mode and
playing discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
DISC main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Selecting chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Skipping chapters forward/back . . . 98
Title list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Audio track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Viewing angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Audio settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Video settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Native DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
On-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Video CD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional restrictions . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on PBC (PlayBack Control).
Switching to DISC mode and
playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISC main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting and playing discs . . . . . .
Selecting tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Native video CD menu. . . . . . . . . .
On-screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
108
108
AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note on copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported signal sources . . . . . . .
Connecting signal sources . . . . . .
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching to AUX mode. . . . . . . . .
Opening the AUX main menu . . . .
Selecting a signal source. . . . . . . .
iPod® playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX main menu during iPod®
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
119
120
120
120
121
121
123
127
127
127
128
129
129
108
109
110
110
111
111
111
114
iPod® menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pausing or resuming playback . . .
Selecting a track . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fast forwarding/reversing . . . . . . .
Repeating tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Random setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting playback . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX main menu during USB
playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting folders and tracks . . . . .
Skipping tracks forward/back . . . .
Fast forwarding/reversing . . . . . . .
Repeating tracks or folders . . . . . .
Random play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic video lock-out. . . . . . . .
Starting playback . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening/closing the AUX main
menu during playback. . . . . . . . . .
Audio settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
131
132
133
133
134
135
136
136
136
138
138
138
139
139
141
142
143
143
143
144
144
144
129
Table of contents
PHONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . .
PHONE main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the PHONE main menu .
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a
mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating Bluetooth® on the
mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing a mobile phone. . . . . . . . .
Connecting a mobile phone . . . . .
Terminating a connection . . . . . . .
Dropped connection . . . . . . . . . . .
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the device list. . . . . . . .
Renaming a phone . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the default phone . . . . . . .
Connecting/Disconnecting a
mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting all pairings . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing details . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
150
150
150
152
152
152
153
153
153
153
156
158
160
161
161
161
161
163
163
164
165
166
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Switching autoconnection function
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Showing the device info . . . . . . . . . 168
Initialization functions. . . . . . . . . . . 168
Changing the passkey . . . . . . . . . . 171
Initiating a call/accepting or
rejecting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Initiating an outgoing call . . . . . . . . 173
Accepting/rejecting an incoming
call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Call history list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Calling up the call history list . . . . . 176
Initiating a call to a call history list
entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Saving a list entry to the
phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Deleting an individual list entry . . . 178
Deleting all list entries . . . . . . . . . . 179
Functions during a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Call display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Mute the microphone . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Switching private mode on/off . . . . 182
Holding and reactivating a call . . . . 183
Sending DTMF tones . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Special functions for two calls. . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling a second party. . . . . . . . . .
Accepting/rejecting a call-waiting
call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Swapping between two calls . . . . .
Ending the active call . . . . . . . . . .
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information. . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the phonebook . . . . . . .
Downloading the phonebook. . . . .
Creating a new entry . . . . . . . . . . .
Scrolling through the phonebook .
Editing an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for an entry. . . . . . . . . .
Initiating a call to an entry . . . . . . .
Deleting phonebook entries . . . . .
Displaying details on an entry . . . .
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS reception. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route guidance after vehicle
transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up the map display and
switching to Navigation mode . . . .
185
185
185
186
186
187
188
188
188
189
190
192
192
194
196
198
199
201
202
202
202
202
203
204
204
Table of contents
Position/scroll mode within the
map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information on the current vehicle
position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the map/setting the map
scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidance volume settings . . . . . .
Navigation main menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Navigation main
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a destination via
the address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a destination via
the Previous Destinations . . . . . .
Entering a destination via
Intersection input . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a POI destination via
POI name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a POI destination via
POI category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a POI destination via
POI phone number. . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a POI destination via
a vicinity search . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a destination via
the Address Book. . . . . . . . . . . . .
204
206
206
207
209
209
210
210
210
215
215
216
220
223
224
Entering an emergency
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a destination via the map
Functions after entering the
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options after entering the
destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set/replace destination . . . . . . . . .
Add waypoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add to Address Book. . . . . . . . . . .
Dial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audible driving recommendations .
Route guidance displays . . . . . . . .
Functions during route guidance . . . . .
Suspending route guidance. . . . . .
Resuming route guidance . . . . . . .
Show route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reroute/detour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the remaining
distance/journey time display . . . .
Change route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
228
229
230
230
230
230
231
231
231
232
235
235
235
235
235
237
237
237
237
238
239
239
Functions independent of route
guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Freeway mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating a phone call to a POI . . .
Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving/deleting destinations in the
Adress Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Book categories . . . . . . .
Entering a destination via the map
and saving it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering the destination by
conventional means and saving it.
Deleting destinations. . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Address Book entries . . . . . . .
Selecting an Address Book entry .
Editing an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Settings menu . . . . .
Map display settings . . . . . . . . . . .
Ferry preference settings . . . . . . .
Avoid Area settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying navigation information .
Reset function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
North up view/Heading up view . .
Map mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
243
243
243
244
245
247
247
247
248
251
254
254
254
258
258
258
260
260
264
264
265
265
227
Table of contents
Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . .
General notes on operation . . . . .
Voice input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Skipping sections of a dialog . . . .
Configuring voice control . . . . . . .
Help function (teleprompter) . . . . .
Operating picklists . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuner mode
(FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio). . . .
Calling up tuner mode . . . . . . . . .
Tuner mode help . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the waveband . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the FM mode . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the frequency
(FM or AM tuner mode only). . . . .
Next/previous station
(FM and AM tuner mode only) . . .
Next/previous channel
(XM® tuner mode only) . . . . . . . . .
Station search
(FM and AM tuner mode only) . . .
267
268
268
268
268
268
269
269
270
271
271
271
272
273
273
273
273
273
273
274
274
274
Selecting stations/channels
stored in the presets . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Selecting channels
(XM® tuner mode only) . . . . . . . . . 274
Scan function
(FM and AM tuner mode only) . . . . 275
Operating examples. . . . . . . . . . . . 275
DISC and AUX mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Calling up DISC or AUX mode. . . . 276
DISC/AUX mode help . . . . . . . . . . 276
Next/previous disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Selecting a disc directly . . . . . . . . . 276
Next/previous folder . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Skipping tracks
forwards/backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Selecting a track directly . . . . . . . . 277
Random Song/Album function . . . . 277
Operating examples. . . . . . . . . . . . 277
PHONE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Calling up PHONE mode . . . . . . . . 279
Phone help. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Dialing a number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Storing numbers in the
phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Calling a phonebook entry . . . . . . . 280
Operating examples. . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Navigation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling up Navigation mode . . . . .
Navigation mode help . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a destination . . . . . . . . . .
Entering a destination stored
in the Adress Book . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspending route guidance . . . . .
Resuming route guidance . . . . . . .
Muting and reactivating navigation
announcements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redefining a navigation route . . . .
Setting a detour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching traffic information on/off
Operating examples . . . . . . . . . . .
Various commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Various commands help . . . . . . . .
Other available commands . . . . . .
Command overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuner commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISC and AUX commands . . . . . .
PHONE commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation commands. . . . . . . . . .
Various commands . . . . . . . . . . . .
284
284
284
284
285
285
285
286
286
286
286
287
287
292
292
292
293
293
293
293
294
294
295
Table of contents
INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the INFO main menu . . . . . .
INFO main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Car Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the Car Settings menu. .
Auto Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Door Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All other functions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening the
System Settings menu . . . . . . . . .
Display Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full Display Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All other functions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
297
298
298
299
299
299
299
300
300
301
302
302
304
Rear camera* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General information and operation . . .
General information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
309
310
310
310
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headunit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
313
314
314
314
314
314
314
304
304
305
305
306
307
307
Table of contents
10
Introduction
Chapters in this manual
This user manual has been designed to
assist in using the Driver Information
System. The manual includes the following
chapters:
DISC mode
PHONE (Bluetooth® Hands-Free)
In this chapter you will find the descriptions
of how to play the following discs:
Audio CD
This chapter describes the phone functions
that can be accessed if there is a mobile
phone connected with the system.
Functional Introduction
MP3 CD
Navigation
This chapter includes the following:
Audio DVD
Functional Description
Video DVD
Menu System
Video CD
Here you will find, among other things,
detailed information regarding the following
topics:
System Components and Controls
FM Main Menu Example
FM and AM mode
Here you will find all information regarding
FM, AM and HD RadioTM1operation.
Destination input
AUX mode
Functions following destination input
This chapter describes how to connect and
play back audio/video from the following
external signal sources:
Route guidance
iPod®3 mobile digital device (audio
playback only)
XM®2 Satellite Radio mode
USB stick (audio playback only)
This chapter describes the XM® Satellite
Radio mode.
AUX signal source (audio and/or video
playback)
1. HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured Under
License From iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and
Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD Radio
logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
2. XM® and the XM® logos are registered trademarks
of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Voice control
Here you will find the description of how to
operate the system with voice control.
INFO
This chapter describes the following topics:
Displaying various vehicles details
Vehicle settings
System settings
3. iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Introduction
Chapters in this manual
Rear camera*1
Here you will find the description of the
Rear camera*.
Appendix
In this chapter you will find the technical
data of the system and a troubleshooting
section.
Table of contents
The table of contents is intended to help
you find information quickly.
1. The asterisk * identifies optional equipment
10
Introduction
Symbols
General symbols
Icon or text Explanation
Icon or text Explanation

Legends for illustrations
are consecutively
numbered.

The asterisk * identifies
optional equipment.

The 'info' icon identifies tips
and additional information.
Display
On-screen displays are
shown in this font.
The filled triangle prompts
you to perform an action.
Command

Two filled triangles
represent the continuation
symbol.
Commands for the voice
control system and voice
output of the voice control
system are shown in italics.
Page 23
This is how a reference to
another page is shown.
etc.
These bullet points are
used to identify lists.

etc.
CAUTION
This warning identifies a situation where
operation may be misunderstood as an error
or when care needs to be taken when
handling or using the product..
Safety instructions
In this user manual you will find various
safety instructions intended to ensure your
personal safety. You should carefully read
and follow all safety instructions.
WARNING
This warning identifies where the possible
cause of serious damage to the product may
be, and possible causes of traffic accident
due to user’s carelessness.
11
Introduction
Operational safety
Safety instructions
WARNING
WARNING
Operating the Driver-Information-Systems
while driving could cause accidents due to
lack of attention to the road.
Operate the system with the vehicle
parked. Some functions of the system
are disabled when vehicle is in motion.
The system is fully functional only when
the vehicle is parked.
Minimize the time looking at the display.
Parking the vehicle in areas where stopping
or parking is prohibited to operate the
Driver-Information-Systems may be a cause
of an accident.
To operate the system, do not park in areas
where stopping or parking is prohibited.
12
WARNING
If you use the phone functions when driving,
you may be distracted from the traffic
situation, thus increasing the accident
hazard.
It is impossible to provide an assurance that
the speed values stored in the digital map
will always match those of the current traffic
regulations in every situation.
Only use the phone functions when the
vehicle is stationary.
Always observe the applicable legal
speed limits and traffic regulations.
If you use the navigation system, you may
be distracted from the traffic situation and
fail to observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities, thus
increasing the accident hazard.
The current legal road traffic speed limit
always takes priority over the values
stored in the digital map.
The vehicle speedometer must always
be given priority for display of the
vehicle speed.
Only enter a navigation destination
when the vehicle is stationary.
Always observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
These always have priority over driving
recommendations made by the system.
Introduction
Operational safety
WARNING
Disassembling or altering the Driver
Information System may be a cause for an
accident, fire or electrical shock.
Do not disassemble or alter the system.
Water or other foreign objects entering the
Driver Information System may be a cause
for an accident, fire or electrical shocks.
WARNING
It cannot be guaranteed that all available
emergency services in your vicinity are
stored in the digital map of the navigation
system.
Do not rely excusively on the navigation
system when attempting to locate an
emergency service (hospital, fire
service, etc.).
Be careful of water or other foreign objects
entering the system.
Using the Driver Information System in its
damaged state, such as display or audio not
working, may cause an accident, fire or
electrical shock.
Touching the antenna during a
thunderstorm could cause an electrical
shock due to lightning striking the antenna.
Do not use the system in its damaged state.
Do not touch the antenne during a
thunderstorm.
Use your own discreption and abilities to
secure help in such situations.
WARNING
The Driver Information System is a class 1
laser product. Opening the housing or a
defective or damaged housing represents
an injury hazard due to invisible laser
radiation.
Do not open the housing.
For safety reasons, have any
maintenance work performed by
qualified service experts only.
CAUTION
Do not place beverages close to the Driver
Information System. The system may be
damaged if you spill them.
Do not strike or allow anything to impact the
Driver Information System. Damage to the
system could occur.
(continued)
13
Introduction
Operational safety
CAUTION
(continued)
Do not use the Driver Information System in
its damaged state. It may cause a critical
damage to the system.
Information about the laser used
This laser product is classified as a class 1
laser product in accordance with the
national/international standards DIN
EN 60825-1 : 2003-10 and DHHS Rules
21 CFR Subchapter J to the date of
manufacture.
14
The laser beam in this class 1 laser product
is so weak that it poses no threat in any
situation, or this product is designed that
the laser beam is limited to the inside of the
device. A laser encased in this device can,
however, still be powerful enough to qualify
as a higher class of laser. For this reason
the protective case should not be opened at
any time (loss of warranty).
Technical data for the laser equipment
inside the device:
Output power from laser beam: 0.68 mW
(DVD) / 0.85 mW (CD)
Wave length of laser beam: 665 nm (DVD)
/ 795 nm (CD)
The laser diode is not pulsed during
operation.
Information about the operating
temperature range
Temperature range in which the Driver
Information System provides full
functionality: -4° F - +149° F
(-20° C - +65° C).
Temperature range in which the Driver
Information System can be stored and
then operate normally in the abovementioned range: -40° F - +176° F
(-40° C - +80° C)
If the temperature is too low or to high, the
Driver Information System may not work.
This is not a product malfunction. So, don’t
be alarmed and use the system after a
while.
Intended purpose
Please keep the following information in
mind when using the Driver Information
System:
The safety instructions in this manual
The road traffic regulations
Introduction
Operational safety
Servicing
Tampering with electronic components or
systems and their software may result in
malfunctions. Even systems which have
not been modified may be affected due to
the connectivity of the electronics.
Malfunctioning of the electronics can
seriously endanger the operational safety
of your vehicle.
Always have all work or modifications to
electronic components carried out by an
approved service center with the necessary
expertise and tools for any work required.
Especially for safety-related operations and
operations on safety-related systems,
servicing by an approved service center is
essential.
Function restrictions when driving
the vehicle
Certain functions, such as Navigation
menu selection or Car Settings may be
restricted or unavailable while driving.
The restriction can be recognized, for
example, from the fact that certain menu
items have no function or that a
corresponding message appears.
Videos such as video DVD or video CD are
viewable only when the gear stick position
is at „P“.
You will find further information in the
corresponding chapters in this manual.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
Canada (IC) compliance statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Caution
Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer, responsible
for compliance, could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radiofrequency radiation exposure
information
The radiated output power of the device is
far below the FCC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device
shall be used in such a manner that the
potential for human contact during normal
operation is minimized.
Bluetooth® information
Bluetooth® Qualified Design ID
Number B014571
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
As soon as the vehicle falls below a certain
speed, the functions are unrestricted or
available again.
15
Introduction
Operational safety
Maintenance
CAUTION
(continued)
CAUTION
The Driver Information System contains
high-quality electronic components which
require special care with regard to
maintenance.
The following should be observed:
The display scratches easily. Clean the
display using a dry, clean and soft cloth
with the system off.
Do not exert excessive pressure on the
displays or other surfaces when
cleaning it.
Rough rub, chemical wipe or solvent
(e.g. alcohol, benzene, thinner) may
scratch or distort the display surface.
(continued)
16
The device must not be sprayed with
cleaning agents or liquids. Ingress of
liquids can result in the destruction of
the equipment.
If the system has any problem, please
contact your Hyundai dealer or an
approved service center to resolve the
problem.
Warranty
CAUTION
Do not open the housing of any system
component.
If you open the housing, the warranty is lost
and after service will not be possible.
Functional introduction
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Operating example for the FM main menu . . . . . . . . 27
Abbreviated list entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
17
Functional introduction
System features
Congratulation to your Driver
Information System!
Advantages of the Driver Information
System
The Driver Information System is a highend multimedia system supporting the
following:
Display
FM, AM and HD RadioTM1 reception
XM®2 Satellite Radio reception
DVD changer supporting up to six discs
of the type audio CD, DVD audio, DVD
video, VCD, MP3 files on CD or DVD,
and WMA files on CD or DVD
External connection supporting USB
with MP3 or WMA files, iPod® mobile
digital device and audio or video AUX
connection via a mini jack.
Especially, the 8-inch display provides high
quality images with great audio output from
Lexicon sound system.
1. HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured Under
License From iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and
Foreign Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD Radio
logo are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
2. XM® and the XM® logos are registered trademarks
of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
18
8-inch LCD provides three aspect ratio for
all video sources for your taste.
Radio
An additional FM tuner allows all available
stations to be available instantly without
having to search through the entire
frequency band.
The integrated HD RadioTM capable FM/
AM tuner offers digital radio reception.
The integrated XM® Radio tuner offers
digital satellite radio reception.
Antenna
Roof antenna (GPS and XM® Radio
reception) and an integrated glass antenna
(FM/AM reception) offers superb reception
quality.
DVD Changer 6
6 discs in the changer at a time provides a
convenient way of changing switching
between discs without the hassle of
searching, removing, and inserting a
desired disc.
Inserted disc type is identified, and auto
play of its content depending on its type
makes it convenient for the user.
With the PBC (supported by MPEG1
version 2.0 VCD) provides a convenient
way of navigating through the contents
provided by the VCD.
Others
A central control panel that offers
commonly used functions at the tip of your
finger gives great control over the Driver
Information System. The rotate-push-press
controller at the center allows great ease of
navigating through the Driver Information
System menus.
Functional introduction
System components
The Driver Information System consists of
the following main components:
Headunit, see page 19
Display, see page 19
Central control panel, see page 20
Function buttons on the steering wheel,
see page 22
Control

Press :
Switching audio/video
playback on/off
Press  and hold:
Switching the display off
Turn :
Setting the volume
Page
Display
The display is located in the vehicle
dashboard.
32
304
33
Headunit

Disc slot
The headunit is located in the vehicle
dashboard.


Ejecting the disc changer
magazine
82


Loading the disc changer
magazine
79

Display
19
Functional introduction
System components
Central control panel
Pushing the controller
The central control panel is located in the
front in the vehicle center console. It
comprises the controller and the main
function buttons.
Push forwards or backwards  , push
to the left or right   , push diagonally
 :
Moving the map, see chapter
“Navigation”, section “Moving the map/
setting the map scale” on page 206.
Turning the controller


Main function buttons
Controller
Push to the left or right  :
Switching between different menu
areas, see page 29 in this chapter.
Push forwards or backwards   :
Scrolling through a list page by
page, see page 29 in this chapter.
Highlighting a menu item, see
page 28 in this chapter.
Controller
You can push, turn and press the
controller , see the following
descriptions.
20
Turn to the left or right  :
Highlighting a menu item, see page 28 in
this chapter.
Functional introduction
System components
Pressing the controller
Main function button



Press:
Confirming a highlighted menu item, see
page 28 in this chapter.
Main function buttons
Page
Main function button

42
Switching mode/band
43
 (short press)
Going back one menu
level
Switching between
fullscreen video and
menu screen:
26
Video DVD
Video CD
109
AUX video
144
96

204
Switching the map from
scroll mode to position
mode while the map is
displayed
204
Calling up a current
audible driving
recommendation
208

209

26
Calling up the map
display and switching to
Navigation mode
Opening the Navigation
main menu

 (long press)
Opening the main menu for
the active main function

Switching to FM or AM
mode
Page
Opening the INFO main
menu
298
Opening the PHONE
main menu
152
21
Functional introduction
System components
Main function button



Switching to DISC mode
and playing discs
Switching to AUX mode
Page
Function button

 and  (short press)
84
95
108
127

Switching to XM® Satellite
Radio mode
Page
57
Function buttons on the steering
wheel

Tuning to a station via
the presets (FM or AM)
47
Skipping chapters
forward/back (video
DVD)
98
Skipping tracks forward/
back:
Audio disc
Video CD
iPod®1 mobile digital
device
USB
88
111

132
138
 and  (long press)
22
Tuning to a station via a
station search (FM or
AM)
Tuning to a channel
using the channel list
(XM® Satellite Radio)
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Function button
 and  (long press)
Selecting and playing
discs
Fast forwarding/
reversing:
USB memory stick
iPod®1 mobile digital
device
 and 
Setting the volume

 (short press)
Calling up main functions
87
97
110
138
133
33
25
 (long press)
45
Switching audio/video
playback on/off

61
Page
32

Activating/deactivating the
voice control system
269
Functional introduction
System components
Function button

Page
 (short press)
Opening the PHONE
main menu
152
Switching private mode
on/off
182
Accepting an incoming
call
175
Accepting a call-waiting
call and holding the first
call
186
Swapping between two
calls
186
 (long press)
Cancel outgoing call
174
Using redial
174
Rejecting an incoming
call
175
Ending a call
184
Ending the active call
187
23
Functional introduction
Menu system
WARNING
Operating the Driver Information System
while driving could cause accidents due to
lack of attention to the road.
Operate the system with the vehicle
parked. Some functions of the system
are disabled when vehicle is in motion.
The system is fully functional only when
the vehicle is parked.
Minimize the time looking at the display.
The Driver Information System is easy to
use thanks to its menu system.
There is a main menu for each of the
following main functions:
AUX (iPod® mobile digital device, USB
memory stick and AUX signal source)
PHONE (Bluetooth® handsfree)
INFO (vehicle and system settings as
well as various vehicle status displays)
Navigation
Composition of the main menu
The main menu for a main function
comprises at most the following three usercontrol areas:

Main menu

Content area

Options menu
FM (FM band)
AM (AM band)
It also contains the following two non-usercontrol areas:
XM® (Satellite Radio)
Top status line
DISC (audio CD, MP3 CD, audio/video
DVD and video CD)
Bottom status line
24
The illustration below shows the main
menu for the FM main function.



Main menu
Top status line
Content area
Highlighted menu item in the Options
menu
Options menu
Bottom status line
Functional introduction
Menu system
Top and bottom status lines
Content area
The top and bottom status lines  and 
contain no user controls. The status lines
are provided for information purposes only
and can show you, for example, the
following:
The content area  shows either the
content of the menu item selected in the
main menu  or a further submenu where
you can again select a menu item.
information on the currently active main
function, see section “Top status line”
on page 27,
information on the currently active
entertainment source (e.g. FM), see
section “Top status line” on page 27,
Bluetooth connection status of the
phone, see chapter “PHONE”, section
“Connecting a mobile phone” on
page 156.
Main menu
The main menu  shows the subfunctions
available for the active main function as
individual menu items.
See page 28 for a description of how to
highlight a menu item and confirm the
selection.
See page 28 for a description of how to
select a menu item and confirm the
selection.
Options menu
For certain displays in the content area 
you can open the Options menu . It
contains additional information or setting
options.
Calling up main functions
Option 1
Pressing one of the following main function
buttons activates the corresponding mode,
provided it was not previously active. If it
was already active, then it remains active.
 FM mode: Press the main function
button , see page 42.
 AM mode: Press the main function
button , see page 42.
 XM® Satellite Radio mode: Press the
main function button , see page
page 57.
 DISC mode: Press the main function
button , see page 84, 95 or 108.
 AUX mode: Press the main function
button , see page 127.
 PHONE mode: Press the main function
button , see page 152.
 INFO mode: Press the main function
button , see page 298.
 Navigation mode: Press the main
function button , see page 204.
or
 Press the main function button ,
see page 209.
25
Functional introduction
Menu system
Option 2
BACK function
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel repeatedly until the desired main
function is called up.
There are certain menus or displays that you
can only exit or close by briefly pressing
the  button.
You cannot switch to the main functions
PHONE, INFO and Navigation on the
steering wheel.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
main function, switching to FM/AM, XM®
Satellite Radio, DISC or AUX main function
on the steering wheel does not switch the
display, only the audio source will be
switched accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the corresponding main function
button on the control panel.
26
Depending on the current system state,
the  button has several functions.
Briefly pressing the  button:
Going back one menu level
Closing the DISC main menu and
returning to video full-screen display:
Video DVD
Video CD
Opening the main menu from the video
full-screen display or closing the main
menu and returning to video full-screen
display (AUX playback)
Pressing and holding the  button:
Opening the main menu for the active
main function
Opening the DISC main menu from the
video full-screen display:
Video DVD
Video CD
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
Switching to FM mode
Top status line
Bottom status line
 Option 1: Press the  button.
The top status line shows various
information.
The bottom status line shows the controller
icons amon other things.


The system will switch to either FM or
AM mode.
If the AM main menu appears:
 Press the  button again.
The FM main menu appears.
 Option 2: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to FM mode.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to FM mode on the steering
wheel does not switch the display, only the
audio source will be switched accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.




Currently active main function
Currently active entertainment source
Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
Currently played frequency (in case of
DISC mode currently played track or
chapter)
Audio play mode/Stereo availability
Controller icons
The icons , ,  and  represent the
directions of movement of the
controller .
The icon  represents turning the
controller .
Each individual icon can be shown in white
or gray.
White icon:
Pushing or turning as appropriate initiates
an operation.
Gray icon:
Pushing or turning as appropriate does not
initiate an operation.
27
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
Main menu, content area and
Options menu
Highlighting a menu item
 Turn   the controller  until the
desired menu item is highlighted.
If you highlight a menu item in the main
menu , then the display in the content
area  can automatically show further
information or menus for the selected menu
item. In the previous illustration, the menu
item Presets is selected and the content
area  then shows the presets in the form
of a list.




Main menu with the various menu items
(blue frame around the menu= menu is
active)
Selected menu item
Blue frame
Content area (no blue frame around the
content area= content area is inactive)
Confirming a highlighted menu item
 Press the controller .
The content area is now active and
supplied with a blue frame.
In the following descriptions, highlighting of
a menu item and confirmation of the
highlighted menu item is combined into one
prompt for action and referred to as
“selecting”.
The illustration below shows, in the content
area , the presets in the form of a list.
You can select and confirm a menu item in
the list as previously described, which, in
this example, will result in the system
tuning to the appropriate station.
28





Main menu
Content area
Selected menu item in the content area
Icon  indicating the Options menu is
available
Icon 
 for the currently played station
The Options menu is only available if the
icon  appears to the right of a menu item.
In the illustration above, the Options menu
is available for all menu items.
Functional introduction
Operating example for the FM main menu
Opening the Options menu
Switching between different menu areas
 With the content area active, push 
the controller  once.
 Push   the controller  repeatedly
until the desired area is active.
The Options menu for the selected
menu item appears. In the Options
menu you can select and confirm
further menu items.
You can tell an active area by the blue frame
around the area.
Lists
The menus in all three user-control areas in
a main menu (main menu, content area and
Options menu) can be displayed in the form
of lists.
In addition to selecting and confirming as
previously described, when using lists the
following options are also available:

Options menu
Closing the Options menu
 Option 1: Push  the controller 
once.
 Option 2: Briefly press the 
button.
The Options menu is now closed and
the content area becomes active again.
Scrolling through a list page by page
Scrolling through a list page by page,
see page 29
Displaying an abbreviated list entry in
full, see page 30


List
Scrolling behavior cursor
If a list contains more than one page, the
scrolling behavior cursor  will be
displayed.
 To scroll down: Push  the
controller  repeatedly until the
desired page is displayed.
 To scroll up: Push  the controller 
repeatedly until the desired page is
displayed.
When you scroll through the list page by
page or select an entry, the scrolling
behavior cursor  moves accordingly. By
doing so it indicates your current position in
the list.
29
Functional introduction
Abbreviated list entries
List entries must be abbreviated for display
in the content area. Abbreviated entries are
indicated by the three dots at the end of the
entry.
Displaying an abbreviated list entry in
full

Options menu
 To call up the complete text: Turn  
the controller  until the menu item
Details is highlighted.
 Press the controller .

The complete text is displayed.
Abbreviated entry
 To call up the Options menu: Push 
the controller  repeatedly until the
Options menu is displayed.
30

Complete text
 To close the complete text: Press the
controller  again.
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Switching the system on
Battery warning message
Please use the system with the vehicle’s
engine running.
WARNING
Hearing damage due to high volume
level!
When switching the Driver Information
System on, a sudden burst of high volume
may be a cause of hearing damage.
When the system switches on, be careful of
the volume level. Set the volume to an
acceptable level before switching the
system off.
 To confirm the safety instruction:
Press the controller .
Vehicles with Start button
After switching the system on, the boot
process starts. During the boot process you
cannot operate the system. It takes some
time until all system functions are ready,
especially for the voice control system.
Vehicles without Start button
 Insert the ignition key into the ignition
and turn to the ACC or IGN position.
The system will switch on and a safety
instruction will be displayed after a short
time.
 Press the vehicle’s Start button once.
If you have not applied the brakes, ACC
and the system is switched on.
If you have applied the brakes, IGN and
the system is switched on and the
vehicle engine starts.
In both cases, the safety instruction
mentioned above will be displayed.
 To confirm the safety instruction:
Press the controller .
The message disappears automatically
when you start the vehicle’s engine.
Prolonged usage of the system with the
engine not running may cause complete
discharge of the battery.
Switching the system off
Vehicles without Start button
 Turn the ignition key to the OFF
position.
The system will switch off.
31
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Vehicles with Start button
Switching off
Switching on
 Press the vehicle’s Start button once.
 Option 1: Press the rotary knob  on
the headunit.
 Option 1: Press the rotary knob  on
the headunit.
 Option 2: Press and hold the 
button on the steering wheel.
 Option 2: Briefly press the  button
on the steering wheel.
The system will switch off.
Switching off during a phone call
If you switch the system off during a phone
call using the hands-free unit of the system,
the call will be transfered automatically
back to the mobile phone (private mode).
Switching audio/video playback on/
off
When the system is switched on, you can
switch audio/video playback off and on
independently. Whether audio/video
playback is switched on or off, you can
switch the system on and off without
affecting it.
The following functions are still available
when audio/video playback is switched off:
32
Voice control system
PHONE (Bluetooth® handsfree)
Navigation
INFO
In both cases, audio/video playback
switches off and the message AV OFF
is shown in the top status line.
In both cases, the audio/video that was
playing before playback was switched
off is resumed.
Additionally, the system switches to the
navigation map display, if one of the
following modes was selected and
shown in the display before playback
was switched off:
 Option 3: Press one of the main
function buttons , or  on
the central control panel.
FM mode
AM mode
XM® Satellite Radio mode
 Option 4: Loading a magazine
compartment, see page 79, page 80
and page 81.
DISC mode
AUX mode
For all other modes, the display
remains unchanged.
The system will switch to the mode
corresponding to the button pressed.
The system will switch to DISC mode.
 Option 5: Connecting an iPod® mobile
digital device or USB memory stick, see
page 123.
In both cases, the system will switch to
the corresponding mode.
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Setting the volume
WARNING
The system automatically saves the
respective setting upon setting.
 Option 1: Press the  button.
If any other mode than FM or AM was
active before, the system will switch to
FM or AM mode.
On the headunit
 Turn the rotary knob .
Driving with the volume set to such a level
that the outside sound is not audible, may
be a cause of an accident.
On the steering wheel
If FM1 was active before, the system
will switch to FM2.
Set the volume to such a level, that the
outside sound is audible.
 Option 1: Briefly press the  or 
button one or more times.
If FM2 was active before, the system
will switch to AM band.
There is one common volume setting for
the FM, AM, DISC and XM® Satellite Radio
signal sources.
There is also one common volume setting
for the AUX signal sources (iPod®, USB
and AUX). Both settings are independent
from each other.
Separate volume settings are possible
for the phone, for audible driving
recommendations and for voice control.
The respective volume can be set during
a phone call, during an audible driving
recommendation and during voice output.
The volume for audible driving
recommendations can also be set in the
navigation settings, see the chapter
“Navigation”, section “Guidance volume
settings” on page 207.
If AM was active before, the system will
switch to FM1.
The volume will change in small
increments.
 Option 2: Press and hold the  or 
button.
The volume will change in large
increments.
 Option 2: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to FM or AM mode.
Audio settings
Switching to FM1/FM2 or AM mode
and switching radio band
The audio settings include the following
functions:
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to FM or AM mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.
Setting the balance/fader, see page 34
Setting the treble/mid/bass, see
page 35
Switching surround on/off, see page 36
Performing an audio reset, see page 36
33
Functional introduction
Basic functions
Opening the Audio Settings menu
The Audio Settings menu is opened in
different ways, depending on the currently
active signal source.
Active signal source is FM, AM, XM®
Satellite Radio, audio CD/DVD, MP3 CD
or AUX (audio)
 In the main menu , select the menu
item Settings .
The Audio Settings menu  is
displayed in the content area .
Active signal source is Video CD, video
DVD or AUX (video)
 Press and hold the  button until the
appropriate main menu is displayed.
 In the main menu , select the menu
item Settings .
The audio/video selection menu  is
displayed in the content area .
 In the audio/video selection menu,
select the menu item Audio.
The Audio Settings menu is displayed
in the content area .
Closing the Audio Settings menu
 Briefly press the  button.
Setting the balance/fader
The balance/fader setting applies to all
signal sources.
The illustration shows the FM main menu
with the main menu activated




Main menu
Audio Settings menu
Content area
Settings menu item
 To open the Balance/Fader menu: In
the Audio Settings menu, select the
menu item Balance/Fader.
The illustration shows the video DVD main
menu with the main menu activated




34
Main menu
Audio/video selection menu
Content area
Settings menu item
The Balance/Fader menu is displayed
in the content area.
Functional introduction
Basic functions
 To set balance or fader: Turn   the
controller  until the desired setting is
reached.
The system saves the setting
automatically.
 To close the Balance/Fader menu:
Push  the controller  once or briefly
press the  button.




Scale for the fader setting
Fader indicator
Balance indicator
Scale for the balance setting
The position of the two indicators  and
 on the scale show the current settings.
The color of the two indicators shows
whether the balance function or the fader
function is active. In the illustration above,
the fader function is active.
 Activating the balance or fader
function: If necessary, press the
controller .
The previously inactive function is now
active.
Setting the treble/mid/bass
The system automatically saves the treble/
mid/bass settings separately for all audio
and video signal sources.
 To open the Treble/Mid/Bass menu:
In the Audio Settings menu, select the
menu item Treble/Mid/Bass.
The Treble/Mid/Bass menu is displayed
in the content area.






Scale for the treble setting
Scale for the mid setting
Scale for the bass setting
Treble indicator
Mid indicator
Bass indicator
The position of the three indicators , 
and  on the scales ,  and  show
the respective current settings.
The color of the indicators shows which of
the scales is active. In the illustration
above, the scale for the treble setting is
active.
You can tell an active scale by the white
frame around the scale.
35
Functional introduction
Basic functions
 Activating a scale: Push   or press
the controller  repeatedly until the
desired scale is active.
There is also a common surround setting
for the following signal sources:
Audio DVD
 To set a value: Turn   the
controller  until the desired setting is
reached.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display will change accordingly.
Video DVD
Display  = function switched on
Audio CD with DTS sound
Display  = function switched off
The indicator moves accordingly on the
scale, showing you the setting.
 To close the Treble/Mid/Bass menu:
Push  the controller  once or briefly
press the  button.
The two settings are independent of each
other. The system saves the settings
automatically.
 To switch the surround function on/
off: In the Audio Settings menu, select
the menu item Surround.
Switching surround on/off
There is a common surround setting for the
following signal sources:
FM
AM
XM® Satellite Radio
iPod® mobile digital device, USB
memory stick and AUX signal source
Audio CD without DTS sound
Video CD
36
Performing an audio reset
You can use the audio reset function to
reset the following features to the factory
settings:
Balance/Fader
Treble/Mid/Bass
Surround
 In the Audio Settings menu, select the
menu item Reset Audio Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the audio settings.


Status display
Menu item Surround
Functional introduction
Basic functions
 Select Yes or No.
The system will or will not reset the
audio settings, depending on the
answer you select.
Video settings
Please see chapter “DISC mode”, section
“Video DVD playback”, subsection “Video
settings” on page 98 for a description of the
video settings.
37
Functional introduction
Basic functions
38
FM and AM mode
HD Radio (TM) information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tuning to stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Showing station details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Audio and FM/AM HD Radio (TM) settings . . . . . . . . 52
39
FM and AM mode
HD Radio (TM) information
Licensing information
HD RadioTM Technology Manufactured
Under License From iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD
RadioTM and the HD Radio logo are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation.
Availibilty information
HD RadioTM reception is available in the
United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii.
What is HD RadioTM technology?
The Driver Information System is able to
receive standard analog FM/AM radio
broadcasting as well as digital HD RadioTM
FM/AM broadcasting.
40
HD RadioTM technology provides digital
and analog reception using existing FM
and AM broadcasting frequencies.
Currently, radio stations broadcasting an
HD RadioTM signal are operating in a hybrid
mode of both, analog and digital, in order to
reach both receivers. In both modes,
analog and digital, the broadcasted
program content is the same (except
multicasting, see below).
Eventually, as analog receivers are
replaced by digital ones, radio stations may
be able to turn off their analog broadcasting
and use only the digital one.
Multicasting
HD RadioTM FM stations are able to
broadcast multiple digital program streams
(channels) over a single FM frequency. For
example, a HD RadioTM FM station can run
a main channel of music and a sub channel
of news (or even two different music
channels) at one frequency.
But only the program content of the main
channel is also broadcasted analog.
HD RadioTM signal delay
To overcome the delay that digital systems
inherently produce, HD RadioTM
technology first uses the audio signal of the
analog broadcasting when you tune to an
AM station or to the main channel of a FM
station. After that, the system will blend
from analog to digital signal.
Normally, this blending is very smooth. If
you experience a skip in program content of
several seconds, the radio station has not
implemented HD RadioTM broadcasting
correctly. This is not a problem with your
Driver Information System.
Due to the fact that sub channels are only
broadcasted digital, blending from analog
to digital signal is not possible if you tune to
a sub channel. In this case playback of the
sub channel starts after several seconds,
this is a normal function.
FM and AM mode
HD Radio (TM) information
Automatic switching between
digital and analog broadcasting
If the reception of the digital signal is lost,
the system switches automatically to the
analog signal. As soon as the digital signal
is available again it will switch back.
Due to the fact that sub channels are only
broadcasted digital, first the system mutes
playback if you have tuned to a sub channel
and the digital signal is lost. Additionally,
the upper status line shows the message
No HD signal in place of station name.
Second, after 1 minute with the digital
signal lost, the system will automatically
tune to the analog signal of the
corresponding frequency.
Text based information
HD RadioTM stations are able to broadcast
text based informations, e.g. station name,
song title and artist name. The Driver
Information System is able to display these
informations.
41
FM and AM mode
General operation
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
FM main menu and upper status line
while receiving an analog FM signal
FM main menu and upper/lower status
line while receiving a digital FM HD
RadioTM signal
Switching to FM or AM mode
 Option 1: Press the  button.
 Option 2: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to FM or AM mode.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to FM or AM mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.








42
Currently active FM mode (FM1 or FM2)
Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
Currently active entertainment source
Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
If transmitted, name of the currently
tuned station else frequency (depends
also on the RDS setting, see section
“RDS on” on page 53)
Indicator for stereo reception
If transmitted, program type (PTY code)
of the currently tuned station, else no
display (depends also on the RDS
setting, see section “RDS on” on
page 53)
Main menu








Currently active FM mode (FM1 or FM2)
Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
Currently active entertainment source
Preset of the currently tunded station in
the presets
If transmitted name of the currently
tuned station, else frequency
Indicator for HD RadioTM reception
If transmitted song title currently
playing, else no display
Main menu
FM and AM mode
General operation
AM main menu and upper status line
while receiving an analog AM signal
AM main menu and upper/lower status
line while receiving a digital AM HD
RadioTM signal
Switching mode/band
There are 16 presets available for the AM
band and 32 presets for the FM band. The
32 FM presets are distributed among 2 FM
modes (FM1 and FM2).
You can use the FM modes to tune to
separate set of stations for different regions.
Using the central control panel
 Press the  button.






Currently active mode
Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
Currently active entertainment source
Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
Frequency of the currently tuned station
Main menu
If FM1 is the currently active mode, the
system will switch to FM2.








Currently active mode
Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
Currently active entertainment source
Preset of the currently tuned station in
the presets
If transmitted name of the currently
tuned station, else frequency
Indicator for HD RadioTM reception
If transmitted song title currently
playing, else no display
Main menu
If FM2 is the currently active mode, the
system will switch to AM band.
If AM is the currently active band, the
system will switch to FM1.
Using the steering wheel
 Press the  button repeatedly until
the band is switched.
With the  button, you cannot switch
between FM1 and FM2.
43
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Overview
The following options are available:
Tuning to a station via the station list,
see page 44
Tuning to a station via a station search,
see page 45
Tuning to a station via manual tuning,
see page 46
Tuning to a station via the presets, see
page 47
Tuning to a station via the Scan
function, see page 47
Tuning to a station via the station
list
 To tune to a station: Select the
desired station in the station list.
The system tunes to the corresponding
station.
This function is only available in the FM
band. The station list contains all the
currently receivable FM stations. It is sorted
by frequency number and is automatically
refreshed and updated by the system.
If the selected station is a multicasting
HD RadioTM FM station, the system
tunes to the main channel of the
corresponding station. The station list
will show the main and the sub channel.
 To request the station list: Open the
FM or AM main menu, see section
“Switching to FM or AM mode” on
page 42.
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Local Stations.
The station list appears.


HD1 = main channel
HD2 = sub channel
 To tune to a sub or a main channel:
Select the corresponding channel in the
station list.

44
Icon 
 for the currently tuned station
The system tunes to the corresponding
channel.
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
Tuning to a station via a station
search
Tune & Seek menu
Using the steering wheel
Tuning to a station
 Press and hold the  or  button.
 Option 1: Briefly push   the
controller .
 The search proceeds upwards or
downwards. After releasing the button,
it stops at the next receivable station.
The seek proceeds upwards or
downwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
Using the central control panel
Opening the Tune & Seek menu
 Open the FM or AM main menu, see
section “Switching to FM or AM mode”
on page 42.
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Tune & Seek.
If HD on is not set in the settings (see
section “HD on” on page 52), you have only
access to analog radio stations.


Frequency indicator (shows the
currently tuned frequency)
HD RadioTM indicator.
TM
The HD Radio
the following:
The Tune & Seek menu appears.
indicator  shows one of
HD followed by a number between 1 - 8
(in case HD on is set in the settings and
the tuned station is a multicasting HD
RadioTM station). Number 1 is the main
channel, numbers 2 - 8 are the sub
channels.
HD - - (in case HD on is set in the
settings and the tuned station is a nonmulticasting HD RadioTM station or it is
not a HD RadioTM station)
No display in case HD on is not set in
the settings
 Option 2: Push  or push  and hold
the controller .
The frequency decreases or increases.
After releasing the controller , the
seek stops at the next receivable
station.
Tuning to a sub channel
Tuning to a HD RadioTM sub channel is only
possible if HD on is set in the settings and
the tuned station is a multicasting HD
RadioTM station.
You can tell this by the HD RadioTM
indicator .
For further information about the HD
RadioTM indicator, please see section “Tune
& Seek menu” on page 45.
45
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
 To tune to another channel: Press the
controller .
For further information about the Tune &
Seek menu, please see page 45.
The HD RadioTM indicator  is
highlighted.




Frequency indicator (not highlighted)
HD RadioTM indicator (highlighted)
 Turn   the controller .
The system tunes to the next or the
previous channel, depending on the
direction of rotation.
 To highlight the frequency indicator
again: Press the controller .
Frequency indicator (highlighted)
HD RadioTM indicator (not highlighted)
Now you can operate the search or the
manual tuning again. For manual tuning,
please see the following description.

Tune & Seek menu
Currently tuned frequency
Tuning to a station
Tuning to a station via manual
tuning
Opening the Tune & Seek menu
 Open the FM or AM main menu, see
section “Switching to FM or AM mode”
on page 42.
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Tune & Seek.
The Tune & Seek menu appears.
46

 Turn   the controller .
The frequency increases or decreases,
depending on the direction of rotation.
Tuning to a sub channel
 Please see the section “Tuning to a sub
channel” on page 45.
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
Tuning to a station via the presets
There are 16 presets available for the AM
band and 32 presets for the FM band. The
32 FM presets are distributed among 2 FM
modes (FM1 and FM2).
You can use the FM modes to tune to
separate set of stations for different regions.
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Presets.
In case of AM, the presets appear in the
form of a list.
In case of FM, the presets of the
currently active FM mode appears in
the form of a list.
For information on switching the mode,
please refer to the section “Switching mode/
band” on page 43.
If you tune via the presets to a no longer
receivable sub channel of a FM HD RadioTM
station, the system mutes playback and
shows the message Acquiring HD Signal
in the upper statusline in place of station
name.
After a certain time without receiving the sub
channel, the upper statusline shows the
message No HD signal. After a certain
time, the system will tune to the analog
signal of the corresponding frequency.
Using the central control panel
 To call up a preset: Open the FM or
AM main menu, see section “Switching
to FM or AM mode” on page 42.
The display  only appears if the stored
station is a HD RadioTM station and HD on
is activated in the settings, see section
“Audio and FM/AM HD Radio (TM) settings”
on page 52.
If HD on is not activated, the channel
display  disappears and access to the
digital signal of stored HD RadioTM stations
is not possible. In this case, you will have
access to the analog signal only.
 To tune to a station: Select the
desired station in the list.
Using the steering wheel
 Briefly press the  or  button.
The system will tune to the previous or
next station stored in the presets.
The illustration shows the FM presets




Currently active FM mode (FM1 or FM2)
Preset number of the currently tuned
station
HD RadioTM channel display (HD1 =
main channel, HD2 - 8 = sub channels)
Icon 
 for the currently tuned station
Tuning to a station via the Scan
function
The Scan function searches through the
selected band, stops at a receivable station,
plays the station for five seconds and goes
to the next receivable station. It will not
search for FM HD RadioTM sub channels.
47
FM and AM mode
Tuning to stations
Starting the Scan function
Stopping the Scan function manually
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Scan.
 Option 1: Press the controller .
The Scan function starts, a
corresponding Scan message is
displayed.
The system will stop the Scan function.
 Option 2: Briefly press the  or 
button on the steering wheel.
The system will stop the Scan function.
Button  was pressed: The system
will tune to the station stored in the
preset 16.
Button  was pressed: The system
will tune to the station stored in the
preset 1.
The Scan function will stop automatically, if
the frequency from where it has been
started is reached again.
It will also stop automatically, if you switch to
another audio/video source. After switching
back to AM/FM again, the system tunes to
the frequency from where the Scan function
has been started.
You can also stop the Scan function
manually.
48
 Option 3: Press and hold the  or 
button on the steering wheel until the
Scan message disappears.
The system will stop the Scan function
and activate the search function.
Button  was pressed: The seek
proceeds downwards and stops at the
next receivable station.
Button  was pressed: The seek
proceeds upwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
FM and AM mode
Storing stations
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Presets.
In case of AM, the presets appear in the
form of a list.
In case of FM, the presets of the
currently active FM mode appears in
the form of a list.
There are 16 presets available for the AM
band and 32 presets for the FM band. The
32 FM presets are distributed among 2 FM
modes (FM1 and FM2).
You can use the FM modes to tune to
separate set of stations for different regions.
 To select a preset (e.g. preset
number 6): Turn   the controller 
until the preset number 6 is highlighted.
 Option 1 to store the currently tuned
station in the preset number 6: Press
and hold the controller  until the
station is stored.
 Option 2 to store the currently tuned
station in the preset number 6:
Push  the controller  once.
For information on switching the mode,
please refer to the section “Switching mode/
band” on page 43.
The Options menu appears.
Storing stations using the station
presets
 To tune to the desired station: See
section “Tuning to stations” on page 44.
 To request the station presets: Open
the FM or AM main menu, see section
“Switching to FM or AM mode” on
page 42.
The illustration shows the FM presets



Currently active FM mode (FM1 or FM2)
Frequency or name of the currently
tuned station (depends on the setting,
see section “RDS on” on page 53)
Preset number 6


Menu item Store Station Here
Options menu
49
FM and AM mode
Storing stations
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store Station Here.
The station is stored.
Storing stations using the Tune &
Seek menu
 To request the Tune & Seek menu:
Open the FM or AM main menu, see
section “Switching to FM or AM mode”
on page 42.
 In the FM or AM main menu, select the
menu item Tune & Seek.
The Tune & Seek menu appears.


50
Tune & Seek menu
Currently tuned frequency
 To tune to the desired station: See
section “Tuning to a station via a station
search” on page 45 or section “Tuning
to a station via manual tuning” on
page 46.
 To request the station preset list:
Press and hold the controller  until
the station preset list appears.
 To store the station: In the station
preset list, highlight the desired preset
and press the controller .
The station is stored.
FM and AM mode
Showing station details
Showing details of the currently
tuned HD RadioTM station
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
The system is able to show the following
details of the currently tuned HD RadioTM
station:
Name and the frequency of the currently
tuned HD RadioTM station,
the title name and the artist name of the
title currently playing.
 To open the Options menu: In the
station list or in the presets, highlight
the currently tuned station.




Menu item Details
Options menu
 To open the details screen: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Details.


Song title name
Artist name
Frequency
Station name
 To close the details screen: Press the
controller .
You will see the details screen.
The menu item Details cannot be selected
if the highlighted station is not the currently
tuned station or if it is not a HD RadioTM
station.


Icon 
 for the currently tuned station
Highlighted preset
51
FM and AM mode
Audio and FM/AM HD Radio (TM) settings
Audio settings
Please see the section “Audio settings” on
page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.
FM HD RadioTM settings
The FM HD RadioTM settings include the
following functions:
HD on, see page 52

RDS on, see page 53

Opening and closing the FM HD RadioTM
settings menu
 To open the Settings menu: Open the
FM main menu, see section “Switching
to FM or AM mode” on page 42.
 In the FM main menu, select the menu
item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
52


FM main menu
Settings menu
Menu item HD Radio
Menu item Settings
 To open the FM HD RadioTM settings
menu: In the Settings menu, select the
menu item HD Radio.
The FM HD RadioTM settings menu
appears.

FM HD RadioTM settings menu
 To close the FM HD RadioTM settings
menu: Briefly press the  button.
HD on
With this function switched off, only the
analog signal of HD RadioTM stations will be
accessible.
After switching this function off while
listening to the digital signal of a HD
RadioTM station (main or sub channel), the
system will switch from the digital signal to
the analog signal automatically.
After switching this function on while
listening to a HD RadioTM station stored as
a sub channel in the presets, the system will
switch from the analog signal to the digital
signal of the stored sub channel
automatically.
FM and AM mode
Audio and FM/AM HD Radio (TM) settings
The status display  changes
accordingly.
After switching this function on while
listening to a HD RadioTM station not stored
in the presets, the system will switch from
the analog signal to the main channel of the
digital signal automatically.
Switching the function on/off
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
RDS on
If the function is switched on:
The upper status line shows the name
of the currently tuned analog FM
station, if transmitted, else the
frequency will be displayed.
The lower status line shows the
program type (PTY code) of the
currently tuned analog FM station, if
transmitted, else no program type will
be displayed.
 Open the FM HD RadioTM settings
menu, see section “Opening and
closing the FM HD RadioTM settings
menu” on page 52.
Switching the function on/off
 Open the FM HD RadioTM settings
menu, see section “Opening and
closing the FM HD RadioTM settings
menu” on page 52.


Station name or frequency
Program type (PTY code) or no display
If the function is switched off:



Status display
Menu item HD on
FM HD RadioTM settings menu
 In the FM HD RadioTM settings menu,
select the menu item HD on.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The upper status line always shows the
frequency of the currently tuned analog
FM radio station.
The lower status line shows no program
type (PTY code).



Status display
Menu item RDS on
FM HD RadioTM settings menu
53
FM and AM mode
Audio and FM/AM HD Radio (TM) settings
 In the FM HD RadioTM settings menu,
select the menu item RDS on.
Switching the function on/off
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
 To open the Settings menu: Open the
AM main menu, see section “Switching
to FM or AM mode” on page 42.
The status display  changes
accordingly.
 In the AM main menu, select the menu
item Settings.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
The Settings menu appears.
AM HD RadioTM setting
The AM HD RadioTM setting include the
function HD on.
With this function switched off, only the
analog signal of AM HD RadioTM stations
will be accessible.
After switching this function off while
listening to the digital signal of a AM HD
RadioTM station, the system will switch from
the digital signal to the analog signal
automatically.
After switching this function on while
listening to the analog signal of a AM HD
RadioTM station, the system will switch from
the analog signal to the digital signal
automatically.
54





AM main menu
Settings menu
Menu item HD on
Status display
Menu item Settings
 To switch the function on/off: In the
Settings menu, select the menu item
HD on.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display  changes
accordingly.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
XM Satellite Radio mode
XM Satellite Radio information/General operation . 56
Tuning to channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Storing channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Status screens and messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
55
XM Satellite Radio mode
XM Satellite Radio information/General operation
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
XM® Satellite Radio information
Licensing information
What is XM® Satellite Radio?
XM® Satellite radio offers the reception of a
multitude of stations - all in digital quality.
A wide range of programs is available, e.g.
music, sports, news, and entertainment, all
largely without the interruption of
advertisements.
Using of XM® Satellite Radio
XM® and the XM® logos are registered
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Availibility information
XM® Satellite Radio is available in the
United States (except Alaska and Hawaii)
and Canada.
56
Before using the XM® Satellite Radio
service, you must sign up with the provider
XM® Satellite Radio. The provider needs
the Radio ID number. It can be displayed in
the Tune & Seek menu after tuning to
channel 0, see section “Tuning to a channel
using the Tune & Seek menu” on page 58.
Without sign up, only the free-to-air
channels of XM® Satellite Radio are
available. Channel 1 (preview/promotional
channel) is one example. But there may be
other free-to-air channels.
The XM® Satellite Radio program is
available for a modest monthly fee.
XM® Satellite Radio may request payment
of an additional fee to enable certain
channels.
For further information about XM® Satellite
Radio please visit the following website:
www.xmradio.com
XM Satellite Radio mode
XM Satellite Radio information/General operation
General operation
Switching to XM® Satellite Radio mode
 Option 1: Press the  button.
 Option 2: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to XM® Satellite Radio
mode.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to XM® Satellite Radio
mode on the steering wheel does not switch
the display, only the audio source will be
switched accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.





®
The following illustration shows the XM
Satellite Radio main menu with the main
menu activated.


Currently active main function
Highlighted menu item in the main
menu
Currently active entertainment source
Preset of the currently tuned channel in
the presets
Channel name or number of the
currently tuned channel (depends on
the setting, see section “Settings” on
page 66)
Indicator for XM® Satellite Radio mode
If transmitted song title currently
playing, else no display
If you have tuned to channel 0, the display
 shows the Radio ID number.

Main menu
57
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
 To request the channel number input
menu: Open the XM® Satellite Radio
main menu, see section “Switching to
XM® Satellite Radio mode” on page 57.
Overview
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Tune & Seek.
The following options are available:
Tuning to a channel using the Tune &
Seek menu, see page 58
Tuning to a channel using the channel
presets, see page 59
Tuning to a channel using the Scan
function, see page 60
Tuning to a channel using the channel
list, see page 61
Tuning to a channel using the category
list, see page 61
Tuning to a channel using the Tune
& Seek menu
Tuning to a channel via the Tune & Seek
menu is restricted to channels you have
subscribed.
The Tune & Seek menu appears.
 To tune to a channel: Turn   the
controller .
The system tunes to the next or to the
previous available subscribed channel,
depending on the direction of rotation.
 To select another category:
Push   the controller .
The next or previous category will be
seleceted, depending on the direction
of pushing. The system tunes to the first
available subscribed channel of the
category.
Showing the Radio ID number
 Tune to channel 0 by turning   the
controller .



Tune & Seek menu
Currently tuned channel
Info display (Artist of the currently
played song and category of the
currently tuned channel)
After tuning to channel 0, the info
display  shows the Radio ID number
instead of artist and category.
Showing details of the currently tuned
channel
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
58
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
Tuning to a channel using the
channel presets
Using the steering wheel
 Briefly press the  or  button.
The system will tune to the previous or
next channel stored in the presets.
Using the central control panel


Menu item Details
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
You will see the details screen.
 To request the presets: Open the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu, see section
“Switching to XM® Satellite Radio
mode” on page 57.
 To tune to a channel: Select the
desired channel in the presets.
A status screen appears if the selected
channel is no longer available, see section
“Status screen Channel Not Available” on
page 70.
Showing details of the currently tuned
channel
 Highlight the currently tuned channel.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Presets.
The presets appear.


 To close the details screen: Press the
controller .
Menu item Details
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.


Icon 
 for the currently tuned channel
Presets
You will see the details screen.
59
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Scan.
The Scan function starts, a
corresponding message is displayed.
 Option 2: Briefly press the  or 
button on the steering wheel.
The system will stop the Scan function.
Button  was pressed: The system
will tune to the channel stored in the
preset 16.
Button  was pressed: The system
will tune to the channel stored in the
preset 1.
 Option 3: Press and hold the  or 
button on the steering wheel until the
Scan message disappears.
 To close the details screen: Press the
controller .
Tuning to a channel using the Scan
function
The system will stop the Scan function.
The Scan function searches through the
subscribed channels, stops at a receivable
channel, plays the channel for five seconds
and goes to the next channel.
The Channel 0 is not covered by the Scan
function.
In the settings, see section “Settings” on
page 66, you can set a category filter for the
Scan function.
The Scan function will stop automatically, if
the channel from where it has been started
is reached again.
It will also stop automatically, if you switch to
another audio/video source. After switching
back to XM® Satellite Radio again, the
system tunes to the channel from where the
Scan function has been started.
You can also stop the Scan function
manually.
Starting the Scan function
Stopping the Scan function manually
 Open the XM Satellite Radio main
menu, see section “Switching to XM®
Satellite Radio mode” on page 57.
 Option 1: Press the controller .
®
60
The system will stop the Scan function.
Button  was pressed: The system
will tune to the previous channel in the
channel list.
Button  was pressed: The system
will tune to the next channel in the
channel list.
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels
Tuning to a channel using the
channel list
Tuning to a channel using the
category list
The channel list contains only channels you
have subscribed. In the settings, see
section “Settings” on page 66, you can set a
category filter for the list.
 To request the category list: Open
the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
see section “Switching to XM® Satellite
Radio mode” on page 57.
Using the steering wheel
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Category List.
 Press and hold the  or  button.
The system tunes to the previous or
next channel in the channel list.



Using the central control panel

 To request the channel list: Open the
XM® Satellite Radio main menu, see
section “Switching to XM® Satellite
Radio mode” on page 57.
 To tune to a channel: Select the
desired channel in the channel list.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Channel List.
The channel list appears.
The category list appears.
Icon 
 for the currently tuned channel
Channel number
Channel name
Channel list
Showing details of the currently tuned
channel
 Proceed as described previously, see
section “Showing details of the currently
tuned channel” on page 59.


Icon 
 for the currently active category
Category list
 Select the desired category.
The channel list according to the
selected category appears.
61
XM Satellite Radio mode
Tuning to channels




Going back to the category list
Icon 
 for the currently tuned channel
Channel number
Channel name
 Select the desired channel.
 To go back to the category list: Press
the  button or select the menu item
, see illustration above.
Showing details of the currently tuned
channel
 Proceed as described previously, see
section “Showing details of the currently
tuned channel” on page 59.
62
XM Satellite Radio mode
Storing channels
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Tune & Seek.
The Tune & Seek menu appears.
There are 16 presets available in the
channel presets.
Overview
The following options are available:
Storing a channel using the Tune &
Seek menu, see page 63
Storing a channel using the channel
presets, see page 64
Storing a channel using the channel list,
see page 64
Storing a channel using the category
list, see page 65
Storing a channel using the Tune &
Seek menu
 To request the Tune & Seek menu:
Open the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu, see section “Switching to XM®
Satellite Radio mode” on page 57.



Tune & Seek menu
 To tune to the desired channel: See
section “Tuning to a channel using the
Tune & Seek menu” on page 58.
 Option 1 to request the channel
preset list: After tuning to the desired
channel, push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
Menu item Store To Presets
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store To Presets.
The channel preset list appears.
 Option 2 to request the channel
preset list: After tuning to the desired
channel, press and hold the
controller  until the channel preset
list appears.
 To store the channel: In the channel
preset list, highlight the desired preset
and press the controller .
The channel is stored.
63
XM Satellite Radio mode
Storing channels
Storing a channel using the channel
presets
 To tune to the desired channel: See
section “Tuning to channels” on
page 58.
 To request the presets: Open the XM®
Satellite Radio main menu, see section
“Switching to XM® Satellite Radio
mode” on page 57.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Presets.
 To select a preset (e.g. preset
number 2): Highlight the preset
number 2.
 Option 1 to store the currently tuned
station in the preset number 2: Press
and hold the controller  until the
channel is stored.
 Option 2 to store the currently tuned
station in the preset number 2:
Push  the controller .
Storing a channel using the channel
list
 To request the channel list: Open the
XM® Satellite Radio main menu, see
section “Switching to XM® Satellite
Radio mode” on page 57.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Channel List.
The channel list appears.
The Options menu appears.
The presets appear in the form of a list.
The currently tuned channel is
displayed in the top status line.





64
Currently tuned channel
Preset number 2
Menu item Store Channel Here
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store Channel Here.
The channel is stored.



Icon 
 for the currently tuned channel
Channel number
Channel name
Channel list
XM Satellite Radio mode
Storing channels
 To tune to a channel: Select the
desired channel.
Storing a channel using the
category list
 To store the currently tuned channel:
Highlight the currently tuned channel
and push  the controller .
 To request the category list: Open
the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
see section “Switching to XM® Satellite
Radio mode” on page 57.
The Options menu appears.
 To store the currently tuned channel:
Highlight the currently tuned channel
and push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Category List.
The category list appears.
 To select a category and tune to a
channel: See section “Tuning to a
channel using the category list” on
page 61.




Menu item Store To Presets
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store To Presets.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Store To Presets.
The channel preset list appears.
 In the channel preset list, highlight the
desired preset and press the
controller .
The channel preset list appears.
 In the channel preset list, highlight the
desired preset and press the
controller .
The channel is stored.
Menu item Store To Presets
Options menu
The channel is stored.



Icon 
 for the currently tuned channel
Channel number
Channel name
65
XM Satellite Radio mode
Settings
Closing the XM® Radio settings
menu
Overview
The XM® Radio settings include the
following functions:
Setting the display in the upper status
line, see page 66
Setting the category filter for the
channel list, see page 67
Setting the category search, see
page 68
 Briefly press the  button.
Setting the display in the upper
status line


Opening the
menu
XM®
Radio settings
Settings menu
Menu item XM Radio
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item XM Radio.
 Open the XM® Satellite Radio main
menu, see section “Switching to XM®
Satellite Radio mode” on page 57.
With this function, you can set whether the
channel number or the channel name is
displayed in the upper status line.
 Open the XM® Radio settings menu,
see section “Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu” on page 66.
The XM® Radio settings menu appears.
 In the XM® Satellite Radio main menu,
select the menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.


66
XM® Radio settings menu

Topmost menu item
XM® Radio settings menu
XM Satellite Radio mode
Settings
The labelling of the topmost menu item 
always shows the current setting. It will
change with every selection.
Possible labellings:
Display by CH Nr. (Upper status line
shows channel number instead of
channel name)
Display by CH Name (Upper status
line shows channel name instead of
channel number)
The current setting is also identified by the
icon to the left of the topmost menu item .
Setting the category filter for the
channel list
With this function, you can set one or more
category filters. After that, only channels
matching to the filter setting are shown in
the channel list. Additionally, the Scan
function plays only channels matching to the
filter setting.
 Open the XM® Radio settings menu,
see section “Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu” on page 66.


Status display
Category filter
Category filter list
 To set a category filter: Select the
desired filter.
Icon
= Upper status line shows
channel number instead of channel
name
The status display  changes
accordingly.
Icon
= Upper status line shows
channel name instead of channel
number
 To change the setting: In the XM®
Radio settings menu , select the
topmost menu item .



Display  = Filter is activated
Display  = Filter is deactivated
XM® Radio settings menu
Menu item Category Filter
 To request the category list: In the
XM® Radio settings menu, select the
menu item Category Filter.
You will see the category list.
67
XM Satellite Radio mode
Settings
You can activate several filters at the same
time.
If you activate the filter “All”, all other
filters are automatically activated.
If you deactivate the filter “All”, all other
activated filters are automatically
deactivated.
If all filters are activated, deactivating
another filter than “All” will also
deactivate the filter “All”.
 To close the category list and go
back to the XM® Radio settings
menu: Briefly press the  button.
Setting the category search
When setting this function, tuning operations
via the  or  buttons on the steering
wheel are restricted to channels with the
same category as the currently active
channel.
 Open the XM Radio settings menu,
see section “Opening the XM® Radio
settings menu” on page 66.
®
68



Status display
Menu item Category Search
XM® Radio settings menu
 To set the category search: In the
XM® Radio settings menu, select the
menu item Category Search.
The status display  changes
accordingly.
Display  = Function is set
Display  = Function is not set
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
Status screen
Channel Not Authorized
If you try to tune from the presets to a
channel which is no longer subscribed, the
status screen  shown below appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message .
If the currently tuned channel becomes
unsubscribed, the same status screen and
the same status message as described
above appears.
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
The status screen and status message
disappears and the system tunes to the
channel 1.
Status screen No Signal
If the received signal is not strong enough,
the status screen  shown below appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message .


Status message Channel Not
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
The status screen  disappears, but
the status message  will be displayed
as long as the received signal is not
strong enough.
In this case, operation of the system is
possible, but the status screen  appears
again, as soon as you try to tune to another
channel.
If the received signal is strong enough
again, the status message  disappears
and the system tunes automatically to your
last tuned channel.
Status screen Loading
If the tuner acquires audio or information/
decoding data, the status screen  shown
below appears. Additionally, the upper
status line shows the status message .
Authorized
Status screen
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
While listening to XM® Satellite Radio, the
status message  may appear depending
on the signal state.
The status screen and status message
disappears and the system tunes to the
channel heard before.


Status message No Signal
Status screen
69
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
Status screen Channel Not
Available
If you tune from the presets to a channel
which is no longer available or if the
currently tuned channel is no longer
available, the status screen  shown
below appears. Additionally, the upper
status line shows the status message .


If you have tried to tune to a channel
which is no longer available, the system
tunes to the channel heard before.
If the currently tuned channel was no
longer available, the system tunes to
channel 1.
Status screen Check Antenna
If the antenna is not connected properly,
the status screen  shown below appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message .
Status message Loading
Status screen
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
The status screen  disappears, but
the status message  will be displayed
unitl the process has been finished.
In this state, operation of the system is
possible, but the status screen  appears
again, as soon as you try to tune to another
channel.
If the process has been finished, the status
message  disappears and the system
tunes automatically to your last tuned
channel.
70


Status message Channel Not
Available
Status screen
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
The status screen and status message
disappears.


Status message Check Antenna
Status screen
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
 To close the status screen: Press the
controller .
The status screen  disappears, but
the status message  will be displayed
until the antenna is connected properly.
The status screen and status message
disappears.
Status screen Channel Off Air
If you tune to a channel which is off air or if
the currently tuned channel goes off air, the
status screen  shown below appears.
Additionally, the upper status line shows
the status message .


If you have tried to tune to a channel
which is off air, the system tunes to the
channel heard before.
If the currently tuned channel was going
off air, the system tunes to channel 1.
Status message Channel Off Air
Status screen
71
XM Satellite Radio mode
Status screens and messages
72
DISC mode
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Loading the disc changer magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Ejecting the disc changer magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Audio disc playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Video DVD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Video CD playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
73
DISC mode
General information
Safety instructions
License notice
WARNING
The Driver Information System is a class 1
laser product.
Invisible laser radiation poses a risk of injury
to the eyes if the cover is opened or
damaged.
Do not open the housing.
The Driver Information System does not
contain any user-serviceable parts.
For safety reasons, any maintenance
work must be performed exclusively by
qualified service experts.
Manufactured under license under U.S.
Patent #’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other
U.S. and worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround
are registered trademarks and the DTS
logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Automatic video lock-out
Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
In the interest of safety, video CD/DVD
playback is only possible if the gear stick is
in position P.
Else you will see a corresponding message
in the display.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
The system switches the picture back on as
soon as the gear stick is in position P.
The video CD/DVD playback sound is not
affected by the lock-out.
74
DISC mode
General information
Supported discs
Multisession CDs
The Driver Information System supports
the following CDs and DVDs:
On multisession CDs, the content of the
first session determines how the Driver
Information System handles the CD.
CD-DA (audio CD)
CD-ROM
CD-R/RW
VCD ( video CD)
DVD-Video (single- and dual-layer)
DVD-Audio
DVD-ROM (single- and dual-layer)
DVD-R/RW
Audio CDs with copy protection do not
comply with the standard and may not be
able to be played.
It may be possible to play DVD-R and
DVD-RW discs, however this cannot be
guaranteed.
Permissible file systems
ISO9660/Joliet for CDs
UDF for DVDs
If the first session contains data in the audio
CD format, for example, and the second
session contains MP3 or wma tracks, the
system will handle the CD as a
conventional audio CD. This means that
the MP3 or wma tracks cannot be
accessed.
If the first session contains MP3 or wma
tracks, for example, and the second
session contains data in the audio CD
format, the system will not handle the CD
as an audio CD. In this case, only the MP3
or wma tracks can be accessed.
Mixed Mode CD/CD-Extra
Mixed Mode CDs are CDs that contain data
in the audio CD format as well as other
data, such as pictures. The Driver
Information System can play back neither
the audio data nor the other data from this
type of CD.
CDs with the designation “CD-Extra” can
have the same content as Mixed Mode
CDs. With CD-Extra CDs, however, the
data is stored in a different manner. The
Driver Information System can play back
the audio data from these CDs.
These CDs can also bear the designation
“CD Plus” or “Enhanced CD”.
MP3 or wma discs
File structure
When creating MP3 or wma discs, you can
organize the tracks into folders. Folders
can also contain further folders
(subfolders). A disc may have a maximum
of 255 folders in total. A maximum of 255
tracks and 255 subfolders are permissible
per folder, with a maximum nesting depth of
8 folder levels.
The system cannot access more deeply
nested folders. The same applies to the
tracks stored in these folders.
A maximum of 4000 tracks in total are
permissible per disc.
Below you will find an example of a file
structure.
75
DISC mode
General information
The Driver Information System does not
support ID3 tags.
Please note the following when assigning
track names:
Track and folder names
When creating MP3 or wma discs, you can
assign names to the tracks and to the
folders. The Driver Information System
uses these names for the corresponding
display when playing the disc. Empty
folders or folders containing data other than
MP3 or wma tracks are not displayed by the
system.
76
Track names must contain at least one
character and should not contain more
than one hundred characters. The
system cannot display names with
more than one hundred characters.
Track names must have the extension
“mp3” (MP3 tracks) or „wma“ (wma
tracks).
A period must appear between the track
name and the extension.
Example of a correct MP3 track name:
Track 1.mp3
The system will not recognize an MP3 or
wma track if:
there is no period between the track
name and the extension
the extension is missing
Supported format
The Driver Information System supports
the wma format (without digital rights
management DRM) and the MPEG1 audio
layer 3 format.
In everyday speech, the MPEG1 audio layer
3 format has been replaced by the
designation “MP3”.
Supported bit and sampling rates
Fixed and variable bit rates up to 320
kbps
Sampling rates from 24 kHz to 48 kHz
Only use MP3 or wma tracks with a bit rate
of 128 kbps or higher and with a sampling
rate of 44.1 kHz or higher. Lower rates may
result in audibly impaired quality. This is
particularly true if the surround function is
activated.
DISC mode
General information
Note on copyright
Notes on discs
CAUTION
The music tracks that you can create for
MP3 or wma playback or can play back in
MP3 or wma mode are generally copyrightprotected under applicable international
and national laws.
In many countries, the reproduction of
copyrighted material is not permitted, even
if only for personal use, without the express
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Please check the current copyright laws for
your country and comply with them.
These restrictions do not apply,
for example, to your own compositions and
recordings, or to recordings for which
authorization has been obtained from the
copyright holder.
(continued)
CAUTION
Do not attach stickers or labels of any kind
to discs. They may come loose and damage
the Driver Information System.
Do not attempt to insert more than one disc
into the disc slot at the same time. This will
destroy the disc changer.
The Driver Information System has been
designed for playback of discs conforming
to the standard IEC 60908. Therefore, only
discs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm
(0.0472") can be used. If a thicker disc is
used, the system may be damaged.
Do not attempt to grab or pull a disc out
while it is pulled into the disc changer by the
self-loading mechanism. Damage to the
disc changer and the disc could occur.
Off-road or rough surface driving may cause
the disc to skip. Do not use the disc changer
when driving in such conditions as damage
to the system or to the disc surface could
occur.
Do not use 8 cm (3.15") diameter discs, not
even with an adapter. Only use round, 12
cm (4.72") diameter discs.
Do not insert any other objects than the
discs described above into the disc slot.
Damage to the disc changer may occur.
Audio CDs with copy protection do not
comply with the standard and may not
be able to be played.
Do not load warped or poor quality discs into
the magazine as damage to the disc
changer may occur.
When playing copied discs, problems
may occur with the playback.
(continued)
77
DISC mode
General information
A wide variety of discs, burning
software and burners are available.
Due to this wide variety, we cannot
guarantee that the system will be able
to play every user-burned disc.
The discs must only be labeld using
pens specially designed for this
purpose.
After use, put the discs back into the
box.
There may be problems playing back
user-burned CDs with a storage
capacity of more than 700 MB.
These CDs do not meet current valid
standards.
Protect the discs from heat and direct
sunlight.
Notes on the care of discs
Only touch the discs at the edges.
Handle discs with care in order to avoid
malfunctions during playback.
Avoid scratching, leaving fingerprints
and dust on the discs.
Clean the discs occasionally with a
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Always wipe in a straight line from the
inside outwards, never in a circular
motion.
78
Notes on playback
If it is raining, at high humidity or after
heating was working, the humidity may
condense at the optical lens of the disc
changer.
In this case, the disc changer cannot work
well. Remove the disc from the disc
changer and wait until the optical lens is
dried.
DISC mode
Loading the disc changer magazine
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Safety instruction
WARNING
If you load the magazine when driving, you
may be distracted from the traffic situation,
thus increasing the accident hazard.
Loading the first available empty
magazine compartment
The following description only applies to
scenarios where a mode other than DISC
mode is active, for example in PHONE
mode.
If you wish to load a magazine compartment
when DISC mode is active, please proceed
as described in the section “Loading a
specific empty magazine compartment”,
see page 80.
 Briefly press the  button.
After a short time, the system will
prompt you to insert a disc with the
message Please insert Disc.
Only load the magazine when the vehicle is
stationary.
General information
 Insert a disc into the slot .
The Driver Information System features a
built-in disc changer magazine with six
compartments.
If the disc is printed on one side, this side
must face upwards when loading the
magazine. If neither side is printed, the side
to be played must face downwards.
Loading the magazine automatically
terminates playback of another disc.
The system will load the disc into the
appropriate magazine compartment
and then play it.


Disc slot
 button
If you wait too long before inserting the disc,
the system will abort the loading procedure.
CAUTION
Only insert a disc into the disc slot  when
the display shows the message Please
insert Disc. The Driver Information System
may be damaged if you insert a disc before
this message is displayed.
79
DISC mode
Loading the disc changer magazine
Loading a specific empty magazine
compartment
Loading the selected magazine
compartment
Opening the DISC main menu
You cannot open the DISC main menu
if the magazine is completely ejected.
The message No playable disc
available will appear instead. If this
happens, proceed as described in the
previous section “Loading the first available
empty magazine compartment”. The system
will automatically load magazine
compartment 1 in this case.
 Press the  button.
The system will switch to either DISC or
AUX mode.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
 Press the  button again.
The system will switch to DISC
mode.
 After the system has switched to DISC
mode, press and hold the  button.
The DISC main menu appears.
80



Occupied magazine compartments
DISC main menu
Empty magazine compartments
Selecting the magazine compartment to
load
 Highlight an empty magazine
compartment in the DISC main menu
.
If you highlight a magazine compartment
that is already occupied, then the system
will automatically load the disc into the first
available empty compartment.


Disc slot
 button
CAUTION
Only insert a disc into the disc slot  when
the display shows the message Please
insert Disc. The Driver Information System
may be damaged if you insert a disc before
this message is displayed.
 Briefly press the  button.
After a short time, the system will
prompt you to insert a disc with the
message Please insert Disc.
DISC mode
Loading the disc changer magazine


 Insert a disc into the slot .
The system will load the disc into the
appropriate magazine compartment
and then play it.
If you wait too long before inserting the disc,
the system will abort the loading procedure.
Loading all empty magazine
compartments
You can also load all empty magazine
compartments in modes other than DISC
mode, for example it also works in PHONE
mode.
Disc slot
 button
CAUTION
Only insert a disc into the disc slot  when
the display shows the message Please
insert Disc. The Driver Information System
may be damaged if you insert a disc before
this message is displayed.
 Press and hold the  button until
you hear a beep sound.
The system prompts you to insert a disc
with the message Please insert Disc.
 Insert a disc into the slot .
The system will load the disc and once
more prompt you to insert the next disc
with the message Please insert Disc.
If you wait too long before inserting the disc
or do not load a further disc, the system will
stop the loading procedure and play the last
inserted disc.
 Repeat the last step after each prompt
until all of the magazine compartments
have been loaded.
After the last magazine compartment
has been loaded, the system will
automatically play the appropriate disc.
81
DISC mode
Ejecting the disc changer magazine
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
WARNING
If you eject the magazine when driving, you
may be distracted from the traffic situation,
thus increasing the accident hazard.
Only eject the magazine when the vehicle is
stationary.
If the disc slot is obstructed and you eject
the magazine, this may cause fire or
electrical shock and may damage the
system.
Ejecting the magazine compartment
containing the last disc played
You can also eject this magazine
compartment if a mode other than DISC
mode is active, for example in PHONE
mode. If the last disc played is no longer
available, the system will eject the first
available occupied magazine compartment.
If you wish to eject a specific magazine
compartment when DISC mode is active,
please proceed as described in the section
“Ejecting a specific magazine
compartment”, see page 82.
 Briefly press the  button.
The system will eject the respective
disc.
 Remove the disc from the slot .
If you wait too long before removing the disc,
the system will automatically pull it back in
after a certain time.
Ejecting a specific magazine
compartment
 Press the  button.
The system will switch to either DISC or
AUX mode.
Only eject the magazine if the disc slot is not
obstructed.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
 Press the  button again.
The system will switch to DISC
mode.


82
Disc slot
 button
 After the system has switched to DISC
mode, press and hold the  button.
The DISC main menu appears.
DISC mode
Ejecting the disc changer magazine
Ejecting the selected magazine
compartment
Ejecting all magazine
compartments
You can also eject all magazine
compartments in modes other than DISC
mode, for example it also works in PHONE
mode.



Occupied magazine compartments
DISC main menu
Empty magazine compartments
Selecting the magazine compartment to
eject
 Highlight an occupied magazine
compartment in the DISC main menu.
If you highlight a magazine compartment
that is already empty, then the system will
eject the disc currently playing.


Disc slot
 button
 Briefly press the  button.
The system will eject the disc.
 Remove the disc from the slot .
If you wait too long before removing the disc,
the system will automatically pull it back in
after a certain time.


Disc slot
 button
 Press and hold the  button until the
first disc will be ejected.
 Remove the disc from the slot .
The system will eject the next disc.
If you wait too long before removing the disc,
the system will automatically pull it back in
after a certain time and abort ejecting of the
magazine compartments.
 Repeat the last step until the magazine
is empty.
83
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Switching to DISC mode and
playing discs
 Option 1: Load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section
“Loading the disc changer magazine”
from page 79.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
The system will switch to either DISC or
AUX mode.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
 Press the  button again.
 Option 3: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to DISC mode.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to DISC mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.
DISC main menu
During playback of an audio CD
After switching to DISC mode, the system
will resume playing the last disc played if
available, otherwise it will play the next
available disc.
If it is a video disc, please select an audio
CD in the DISC main menu, see the section
“Selecting and playing discs” on page 97.
If the magazine is empty, the message No
playable disc available appears. If this
happens, load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section “Loading
the disc changer magazine” from page 79.










84
Currently active main function
DISC main menu with list of discs
Currently active entertainment source
Track currently playing
Track list of the disc currently playing
Name of the disc currently playing
Play icon  for the track currently
playing
Disc currently playing
Icon
for an audio CD
Play icon  for the disc currently
playing
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
During playback of an MP3 or wma CD
During playback of an audio DVD
Displaying the disc, track and folder
names
The list of discs in the DISC main menu
(please see  in the previous three
illustrations) shows the discs available in
the magazine by their names, provided the
names are stored on the discs. If there are
no names stored, the respective disc type
is displayed.










Currently active main function
DISC main menu with list of discs
Currently active entertainment source
Track currently playing
Track or folder list of the disc currently
playing
Name of the disc currently playing
Play icon  for the track currently
playing or the current folder
Disc currently playing
Icon
for an MP3 CD
Play icon  for the disc currently
playing
The display  shows also the folder
currently playing if the track currently
playing is stored in a folder.










Currently active main function
DISC main menu with list of discs
Currently active entertainment source
Track currently playing
Track list of the disc currently playing
Name of the disc currently playing
Play icon  for the track currently
playing
Disc currently playing
Icon
for an audio DVD
Play icon  for the disc currently
playing
The track or folder list (please see  in the
previous three illustrations) shows the
tracks or folders on the disc currently
playing.
The number display on the left of each
entry in the track or folder list shows a
maximum of three digits. In case of list
entries beyond 999, the number display will
be truncated. Example: List entry 1006 will
be displayed as 006.
In the case of audio CDs and audio DVDs,
the tracks are displayed with their names if
the names are stored on the disc. If there
are no names stored, “Track” followed by
the appropriate track number is displayed.
85
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
In the case of MP3 or wma CDs, the system
uses the names assigned during creation
of the CD to display the CD, track and
folder names. Any ID3 tags in the files are
ignored.
Calling up a details or play info display
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
the desired track or folder and push 
the controller .
The Options menu appears.
If a track or folder name is too long, the
system will display it in abbreviated form.
This is indicated by the three dots “…” at
the end of the name. If this happens, you
can call up a complete name display.

Details display
 To close the details display: Press
the controller .

Options menu
 To call up the details display: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Details.

Abreviated track name
You can call up a details display if you want
to see the complete track name.
In case of MP3 or WMA discs, you can call
up a play info display if you want to see
further information.
86
In case of an audio disc, the details display
containing the complete track name
appears.
In case of a MP3 or WMA disc, the details
display containing the complete file name
appears.
 To call up the play info display (MP3
and WMA disc only): In the Options
menu, select the menu item Play Info.
The play info display of the track
currently playing appears, containing
several information.
DISC mode
Audio disc playback





Unknown discs
Selecting and playing discs
Discs that have not yet been played after
the magazine has been loaded are not
known to the system. They are displayed
as follows.
Selecting using the central control
panel
Current folder name
Current file name
Current song title
Current album title
Current artist name
In order to display the current song title,
album title and artist name, these
information must be stored as ID3 tags
inside the MP3 or WMA track.
If you select another track or if the system
plays the next track, the play info display will
not be closed and it will be updated
automatically.
 To close the play info display: Press
the controller .



Icon
for an unknown disc
Display for the unknown content of the
unknown disc
As soon as an unknown disc is played,
display takes place as previously described
in the section “Displaying the disc, track
and folder names”, see page 85.
The system does not store the data,
therefore after a disc is removed from the
magazine and reinserted at a later date, it
may be unknown to the system once more.






Icon
for a video CD
Icon
for a video DVD
Icon
for an audio DVD
Icon
for an audio CD
Icon
for an MP3 CD
DISC main menu with list of discs
Play icon  for the disc currently playing
 Select an audio disc in the list of discs
in the DISC main menu.
87
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
Selecting using the steering wheel
 Press and hold the  or  button.
The system will play the previous or
next disc, depending on the button
pressed.
The previous or next disc may also be a
video disc, depending on how the magazine
compartments are loaded.
Pausing or resuming playback
 To resume: Highlight the track
currently playing once more and press
the controller .
The pause icon  will change to the
play icon .
Selecting folders and MP3 or wma
tracks
This function is only available for MP3 or
wma CDs. Folders can only be selected if
the MP3 or wma tracks were organized into
folders when the CD was created.
Selecting tracks
“Skip track forward” skips to the next track.
“Skip track back” skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 10 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
10 seconds, it will skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
Skipping tracks forward/back
 Briefly press the  or  button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.


Play icon 
Track currently playing (highlighted)
 To pause: Highlight the track currently
playing and press the controller .
The play icon  will change to the
pause icon .
88




Menu item for the folder change
function
Folder
Play icon  for track currently playing
Track
Highlighted track
Track list

You can select a specific track for playback
directly in the track list.
 To switch to the next folder level up:
Select the menu item .
 Select the desired track in the track list.
The display will change accordingly.
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
 To open a folder: Select the desired
folder.
You will see the tracks stored in this
folder.
 To open the Group menu: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Change Group.
The Group menu appears. The group
currently being played is marked with
the play icon .
 To play a track: Select the desired
track.
Fast forwarding/reversing
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push  the controller .
Selecting a group
This function is only available for audio
DVDs. The music tracks on an audio DVD
can be organized into up to nine groups.
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push  the controller .

The Options menu appears.


Play icon 
Group menu
 Select the desired group.
The system will play the first track in the
chosen group.

Options menu
Options menu
 To start forwarding: In the Options
menu, select the menu item FF and
press and hold the controller .
 To start reversing: In the Options
menu, select the menu item REW and
press and hold the controller .
 To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the controller .
During fast forwarding/reversing the track
time changes are displayed in the upper
status line.
89
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
Repeating tracks or folders
The repeat track function switches off
automatically when you select another
track.
This function will keep repeating a track or
folder until it is cancelled. In the case of MP3
or wma CDs, repetition of folders is only
possible if the CD contains folders. Tracks
in subfolders within the folder to be repeated
will be ignored.
The repeat folder function switches off
automatically when you select a track in
another folder.
Both functions are switching off
automatically when you:
 Highlight the desired track or folder.


Status display
Options menu
 To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Repeat Track or Repeat Folder.



Folder
Highlighted track
Track
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
90
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display  changes accordingly.
Random play
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
Switching random play of all tracks
on/off
When the function is switched on, the icon
(repeat track) or
(repeat folder)
additionally appears on the right in the top
status line.
Random play of all tracks plays all tracks on
a current audio or MP3 or wma CD in
random order.
In the case of audio DVDs, random play is
restricted to the tracks in the currently active
group.
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
 Highlight the track currently playing.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Random Disc.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display  changes
accordingly.

Highlighted track currently playing.
You can tell the track currently playing by the
play icon .
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .


Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
Switching random play within a specific
folder on/off
Random play within a specific folder only
applies to MP3 or wma CDs. It plays all
tracks in a specific folder in random order.
Tracks in subfolders within the specific
folder will be ignored.
 Highlight the desired folder.
When the function is switched on, the
icon
additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.

Highlighted folder
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Status display
Options menu
91
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
The function switches off automatically
when you:


Status display
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Random Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display  changes
accordingly.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
select any track,
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Scan function
This function plays about 10 seconds of
each track on the disc currently playing and
then skips to the next track.
 Highlight the track from which you want
the function to start.
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .


Status display
Options menu
 To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Scan.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off.
The status display  changes
accordingly.
When the function is switched on, the
icon
additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
When the function is switched on, the
icon
appears additionally on the
right in the top status line.

92
Highlighted track
DISC mode
Audio disc playback
The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
eject a magazine compartment,
select another disc,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
It also switches off automatically when it
reaches the track where it started.
Audio settings
Please see the section “Audio settings” on
page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.
93
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Region
code
Country
Region
code
Country
No region code (DVD can be
played with all DVD players
independently of the player’s
region code)
Bermuda, Canada, Cayman
Islands, U.S.A. and U.S.A.
territories
African countries not
explicitly included in other
regions, Indian subcontinent,
Mongolia, North Korea,
Seychelles, countries
included in the former
Soviet Union
Egypt, Europe, Greenland,
Japan, Lesotho, Middle East,
South Africa, Swaziland
China (except Macau and
Hongkong)
Reserved
Hongkong, Macau, Parts of
South East Asia,
South Korea, Taiwan,
The Philippines
Cruise ships, Airlines etc.
Video DVD playback conditions
Retailers supply video DVDs that do not
meet the standards.
These video DVDs may cause picture,
sound or other playback problems.
DVD region code
Most of the video DVDs are encoded with a
region code intended to restrict the area of
the world in which they can be played.
Information about which region code a
DVD has can usually be found either on the
video DVD itself or on the sleeve.
In order to play a video DVD, the video
DVD and the video DVD player must have
the same region code.
Below you will find the possible region
codes and the countries assigned.
94
Australia, Central America,
Latin America (including
Mexico), New Guinea,
New Zealand, Oceania,
Papua, The Caribbean
For example, DVD players sold in the
U.S.A. have the region code 2, and video
DVDs sold in the U.S.A. can have the
region code 0 or 2.
So, if you insert a DVD with a region code
except 0 or 2 into an U.S.A. DVD player
(e.g. the disc changer of the Driver
Information System), the DVD will not be
played.
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
TV Standard
The Driver Information System can play
video DVDs that meet PAL or NTSC TV
standard.
Information on this can usually be found
either on the DVD itself or on the DVD
sleeve.
Functional restrictions
It may be the case that some functions or
actions may not be possible at certain
times, or may not be possible in general,
depending on the video DVD.
When such functions or actions are
activated, they are indicated by the icon
in the top left corner of the display.

Switching to DISC mode and
playing discs
 Option 1: Load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section
“Loading the disc changer magazine”
from page 79.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
The system will switch to either DISC or
AUX mode.
If the system switches to AUX mode:
 Press the  button again.
 Option 3: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to DISC mode.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to DISC mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.
After switching to DISC mode, the system
will resume playing the last disc played if
available, otherwise it will play the next
available disc.
If it is an audio disc, please select a video
DVD in the DISC main menu, see the
section “Selecting and playing discs” on
page 87.
If it is a video CD, please select a video
DVD in the DISC main menu, see the
section “Selecting and playing discs” on
page 97.
If the magazine is empty, the message No
playable disc available appears. If this
happens, load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section “Loading
the disc changer magazine” from page 79.
Playback will not start if the DVD has the
wrong region code. Instead you will see an
appropriate message.
After video playback starts, the system will
show the video content as a full-screen
display.
Icon
95
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
Closing the DISC main menu and
returning to video full-screen display
 Option 1: In the content area  with
the native DVD menu select the menu
item Return to Screen.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
Displaying the disc name
You can open the following menus during
playback:



DISC main menu, see page 96

Native DVD menu, see page 101

On-screen menu, see page 105
DISC main menu
Opening the DISC main menu
 During video playback, press and hold
the  button until the DISC main
menu appears.
Video playback continues in the background
when the DISC main menu is open.
96





Currently active main function
DISC main menu with list of discs
Currently active entertainment source
Chapter currently playing
Content area with native DVD menu
Name of the disc currently playing
Open the Settings menu
Disc currently playing
Icon
for a video DVD
Play icon  for the disc currently
playing
The list of discs in the DISC main menu 
shows the discs available in the magazine
by their names, provided the names are
stored on the discs. If there are no names
stored, the respective disc type will be
displayed.
If a video DVD is highlighted in the list of
discs in the DISC main menu , then the
content area  will display the native DVD
menu if the DVD has the correct region
code.
If it does not have the correct region code,
the content area  will display the
message Wrong DVD region code.
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
Unknown discs
Selecting and playing discs
Discs that have not yet been played after
the magazine has been loaded are not
known to the system. They are displayed
as follows.
Selecting using the central control
panel
 To open the DISC main menu: During
video playback, press and hold
the  button until the DISC main
menu appears.
 To play a disc: Select a video DVD in
the DISC main menu .
Selecting using the steering wheel
 Press and hold the  or  button.
The system will play the previous or
next disc, depending on the button
pressed.
The previous or next disc may also be an
audio disc or a video CD, depending on how
the magazine compartments are loaded.
Selecting chapters


Icon
for an unknown disc
Display for the unknown content of
the unknown disc
As soon as an unknown disc is played,
display takes place as previously described
in the section “Displaying the disc name”,
see page 96.
The system does not store the data,
therefore after a disc is removed from the
magazine and reinserted at a later date, it
may be unknown to the system once more.
If a film contains chapters, you can use the
chapter list or the chapter skip function to
select a chapter for playback.







Icon
for a video CD
Icon
for a video DVD
Icon
for an audio DVD
Icon
for an audio CD
Icon
for an MP3 CD
DISC main menu with list of discs
Play icon  for the disc currently playing
Chapter list
This function is described in the section
“Native DVD menu”, see page 101.
97
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
Skipping chapters forward/back
Audio settings
These two functions are also available in the
on-screen menu, see the section “Skipping
chapters forward/back” on page 107.
Please see the section “Audio settings” on
page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.
 Briefly press the  or  button on
the steering wheel.
Video settings
The system will execute the chapter
skip corresponding to the button
pressed.
Title list
Open the Video Settings menu
 During video playback, press and hold
the  button until the DISC main
menu appears.
This function is described in the section
“Native DVD menu”, see page 101.

Selection menu
 In the selection menu, select the menu
item Video.
The Video Settings menu appears.
Subtitle
This function is described in the section
“Native DVD menu”, see page 101.
Audio track
This function is described in the section
“Native DVD menu”, see page 101.
Viewing angle
This function is described in the section
“Native DVD menu”, see page 101.
98
 In the DISC main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
A selection menu appears.

Video settings menu
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
The Video Settings menu includes the
following functions:
Aspect ratio, see page 99
Brightness, color and contrast, see
page 99
Video reset, see page 100
 To open the Aspect Ratio menu: In
the Video Settings menu, select the
menu item Aspect Ratio.
The Aspect Ratio menu appears.
Close the Video Settings menu
 Briefly press the  button.

Aspect ratio
 Open the Video settings menu, see
section “Open the Video Settings
menu” on page 98.

Icon  for currently active setting
Video settings menu
 To open the desired menu: In the
Video Settings menu, select either the
menu item Brightness, Color or
Contrast.
The corresponding menu appears.
 To set the aspect ratio: Select the
desired setting.
Brightness, color and contrast
 Open the Video settings menu, see
section “Open the Video Settings
menu” on page 98.

Video settings menu
The illustration shows the brightness setting


Scale for the brightness setting
Indicator
99
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
 Select Yes or No.
The position of the indicator  on the scale
 shows the current setting.
The system will or will not reset the
video settings, depending on the
answer you select.
 Turn   the controller  until the
desired setting is reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
Language settings
 To close the menu: Press the
controller .
or
 Briefly press the  or  button.
Video reset
You can use the video reset function to
reset the following settings to their factory
settings:
Aspect ratio
Brightness
Color
Contrast
 Open the Video settings menu, see
section “Open the Video Settings
menu” on page 98.

Video settings menu
 To open the Video Reset menu: In the
Video Settings menu, select the menu
item Reset Video Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the video settings.
After starting DVD playback, some DVDs
will show a language menu. In this language
menu a specific language is marked by
default, it depends on the DVD content.
With the language settings you can set a
different language which should be marked
in the language menu as default in future.
If the DVD does not contain that different
language, the DVD depending language is
marked by default.
This setting is applied only when a DVD is
inserted, changing this setting during
playback does not have an effect.
 To open the Language Settings
menu: During video playback, press
and hold the  button until the DISC
main menu appears.
 Select the menu item Settings.
A selection menu appears.
100
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
 To change the language: Select the
desired language.
Native DVD menu
Subtitle, see page 103
Audio track, see page 104
Viewing angle, see page 104
Depending on the content of the DVD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Opening the native DVD menu

This function is also available in the
on-screen menu, see the section “Opening
the native DVD menu” on page 105.
Selection menu
 In the selection menu, select the menu
item Menu Language.
The Language menu appears.

Native DVD menu
 During video playback, briefly press
the  button.
The native DVD menu appears
(video playback continues invisibly in
the background).
The native DVD menu includes the
following functions:

Icon  for currently active setting
Closing the native DVD menu and
returning to video full-screen display,
see page 102
DVD top menu/DVD menu, see
page 102
Chapter list, see page 102
Title list, see page 103

Native DVD menu
101
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
Closing the native DVD menu and
returning to video full-screen display
 Option 1: In the native DVD menu,
select the menu item Return to
Screen.
 To open the desired menu: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
DVD Top Menu or DVD Menu.
 Open the native DVD menu, see
section “Opening the native DVD menu”
on page 101.
The relevant menu appears as a fullscreen display.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
DVD top menu/DVD menu
The DVD top menu or DVD menu is stored
on the DVD itself. The content, structure
and language of the menus as well as the
available menu items will vary depending on
the DVD.
You can also set the menu language in the
language settings, see page 100.
 Open the native DVD menu, see
section “Opening the native DVD menu”
on page 101.


Menu items
 To highlight a menu item: Turn   or
push     the controller .
Native DVD menu
 To call up the chapter list: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
Chapter List.
The chapter list appears.
 To confirm the highlighted menu
item: Press the controller .
 To exit the menu: Highlight the
corresponding menu item and confirm.
Chapter list
You can select a specific chapter for
playback directly in the chapter list.

Native DVD menu
102

Chapter currently playing (icon 
)
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
 To play a chapter: Select the desired
chapter.
Title list
If a DVD contains several titles or films, you
can select a specific title or film for playback
directly in the title list.
 Open the native DVD menu, see
section “Opening the native DVD menu”
on page 101.

Play icon 
 for title currently playing
 To select a title or film: Select the
desired title or film.
Subtitle

 To open the Subtitle menu: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
Subtitle.
The Subtitle menu appears.
If a DVD contains subtitles, you can switch
them on or off in the Subtitle menu. The
number and language of the subtitles will
vary depending on the DVD.

Native DVD menu
Native DVD menu
 Open the native DVD menu, see
page 101.
 To call up the title list: In the native
DVD menu, select the menu item Title
List.
The title list appears.

Icon 
 for currently active setting
 To switch subtitles on: Select the
desired subtitles.
103
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
 To switch subtitles off: Select the
respective menu item.
Audio track
If a DVD contains several audio tracks, you
can switch between them in the Audio Track
menu. The number and languages of the
audio tracks will vary depending on the
DVD.
 Open the native DVD menu, see
page 101.

Icon 
 for currently active setting
 To switch audio track: Select the
desired audio track.
Viewing angle
If a title or film contains several viewing
angles (camera angles), you can switch
between them in the Angle menu. The
number of viewing angles will vary
depending on the DVD.

Native DVD menu
 To open the Audio Track menu: In the
native DVD menu, select the menu item
Audio Track.
The Audio Track menu appears.
104
 Open the native DVD menu, see
section “Opening the native DVD menu”
on page 101.

Native DVD menu
 To open the Angle menu: In the native
DVD menu, select the menu item
Angle.
The Angle menu appears.
 To switch viewing angle: Select the
desired viewing angle.
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
On-screen menu
Opening the on-screen menu
Closing the on-screen menu
You can call up the following in the
on-screen menu:
You cannot open the on-screen menu if the
DVD top menu or DVD menu stored on the
DVD is open.
 Option 1: In the on-screen menu,
select the menu item .
The native DVD menu, see page 105.
The chapter list, see page 106.
In addition you can control the following
playback functions:
 During video playback, press the
controller .
The on-screen menu will be shown over
the video currently playing.
 Option 2: Briefly press the 
button.
 Option 3: Do nothing and wait until the
on-screen menu is automatically
closed.
Pausing or resuming playback, see
page 106
Opening the native DVD menu
Skipping chapters forward/back, see
page 107
This function is also available outside the
on-screen menu, see the section “Opening
the native DVD menu” on page 101.
Fast forwarding/reversing, see
page 107
Depending on the content of the DVD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 105.









Pause/resume playback
Skip chapter back
Skip chapter forward
Open the native DVD menu
Close the on-screen menu
Call up the chapter list
Fast reverse
Fast forward
Shows the selected menu item  - 


On-screen menu
Menu item
105
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
 To open the native DVD menu: In the
on-screen menu , select the menu
item .
The native DVD menu will be shown
over the video currently playing.
 To close the native DVD menu: Briefly
press the  button or do nothing and
wait until the menu is automatically
closed.
Calling up the chapter list
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 105.

Chapter currently playing (icon 
)
 To play a chapter: Select the desired
chapter from the chapter list.
Pausing or resuming playback
Please see the section “Native DVD
menu” on page 101 for a description of
the menu functions.
The menu item Return to Screen described
on page 101 is not part of the native DVD
menu displayed on-screen over the video
currently playing.


Menu item
On-screen menu
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 105.
 To call up the chapter list: In the onscreen menu , select the menu item
.
The chapter list will be shown over the
video currently playing.


106
Menu item
On-screen menu
DISC mode
Video DVD playback
 To pause or resume playback: In the
on-screen menu , select the menu
item .
 To skip chapters: In the on-screen
menu , select the menu item  or
.
The system will pause or resume
playback, depending on the previous
status.
The system will execute the chapter
skip corresponding to the menu item
selected.
Skipping chapters forward/back
Fast forwarding/reversing
These two functions are also available on
the steering wheel, see the section
“Skipping chapters forward/back” on
page 98.
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 105.
 To start fast forwarding/reversing: In
the on-screen menu , select the
menu item  or  and press and hold
the controller .
The system will start fast forwarding
or fast reversing depending on the
selection. The sound is muted during
this.
 To terminate fast forwarding/
reversing: Release the controller .
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 105.






Fast reversing
Fast forwarding
On-screen menu
On-screen menu
Skipping chapters back
Skipping chapters forward
107
DISC mode
Video CD playback
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Notes on PBC (PlayBack Control)
Functional restrictions
It may be the case that some functions or
actions may not be possible at certain
times, or may not be possible in general,
depending on the video CD.
When such functions or actions are
activated, they are indicated by the icon
in the display.
PBC is a feature that allows users to
navigate the content of a VCD (in
MPEG1 version 2.0 VCD) with one or
more interactive menus.
PBC feature only works with VCD
version 2.0.
PBC feature may have different
behavior depending on how the VCD
was developed.
Switching to DISC mode and
playing discs
 Option 1: Load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section
“Loading the disc changer magazine”
from page 79.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
The system will switch to either DISC or
AUX mode.

Icon
If the system switches to AUX mode:
 Press the  button again.
108
 Option 3: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to DISC mode.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to DISC mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly.
If you want to switch the display also, you
must use the  button on the control
panel.
After switching to DISC mode, the system
will resume playing the last disc played if
available, otherwise it will play the next
available disc.
If it is an audio disc, please select a video
CD in the DISC main menu, see the section
“Selecting and playing discs” on page 87.
If it is a video DVD, please select a video
CD in the DISC main menu, see the section
“DISC main menu” on page 96.
If the magazine is empty, the message No
playable disc available appears. If this
happens, load the magazine with an
appropriate disc, see the section “Loading
the disc changer magazine” from page 79.
DISC mode
Video CD playback
After video playback starts, the system will
show the video content as a full-screen
display. You will see either the film or the
PBC (Playback Control) menu stored on
the video CD.
Closing the DISC main menu and
returning to video playback
What you see depends on the video CD
itself and also on whether the display of the
PBC menu is switched on or off.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
You can switch the display of the PBC
menu on or off in the native video CD
menu, see page 111.
You can open the following menus during
playback:
 Option 1: In the content area  with
the native video CD menu select the
menu item Return to Screen.
Displaying the disc name





DISC main menu, see page 96
Native video CD menu, see page 111

On-screen menu, see page 114

DISC main menu
Opening the DISC main menu
 During video playback, press and hold
the  button until the DISC main
menu appears.



Currently active main function
DISC main menu with list of discs
Currently active entertainment source
Track currently playing
Content area with native video CD
menu
Name of the disc currently playing
Open the Settings menu
Disc currently playing
Icon
for a video CD
Play  icon for the disc currently
playing
Video playback continues in the background
when the DISC main menu is open.
The list of discs in the DISC main menu 
shows the discs available in the magazine
by their names, provided the names are
stored on the discs. If there are no names
stored, the respective disc type will be
displayed.
If a video CD is highlighted in the list of
discs in the DISC main menu , then the
content area  will display the native video
CD menu.
Unknown discs
Discs that have not yet been played after
the magazine has been loaded are not
known to the system. They are displayed
as follows.
109
DISC mode
Video CD playback
Selecting and playing discs
 To play a disc: Select a video CD in the
DISC main menu .
Selecting using the central control
panel
Selecting using the steering wheel
 To open the DISC main menu: During
video playback, press and hold
the  button until the DISC main
menu appears.


Selecting tracks
If a video CD contains several tracks, you
can use the track list or the track skip
function to select a track for playback.







110
The system will play the previous or
next disc, depending on the button
pressed.
The previous or next disc may also be an
audio disc or a video DVD, depending on
how the magazine compartments are
loaded.
Icon
for an unknown disc
Display for the unknown content of the
unknown disc
As soon as an unknown disc is played,
display takes place as previously described
in the section “Displaying the disc name”,
see page 109.
The system does not store the data,
therefore after a disc is removed from the
magazine and reinserted at a later date, it
may be unknown to the system once more.
 Press and hold the  or  button.
Icon
for a video CD
Icon
for a video DVD
Icon
for an audio DVD
Icon
for an audio CD
Icon
for an MP3 CD
DISC main menu with list of discs
Play icon  for the disc currently playing
Track list
You can select a specific track for playback
directly in the track list.
This function is described in the section
“Native video CD menu”, see page 111.
DISC mode
Video CD playback
Skipping tracks forward/back
Native video CD menu
“Skip track forward” skips to the next track.
“Skip track back” skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 10 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
10 seconds, it will skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
This function is also available in the onscreen menu, see the section “Opening the
native video CD menu” on page 115.
 During video playback, briefly press
the  button.
The native video CD menu appears
(video playback continues in the
background).
These two functions are also available in the
following menus:
PBC menu, see page 112
On-screen menu, see page 114
 Briefly press the  or  button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.

Native video CD menu
The native video CD menu includes the
following functions:
Closing the native video CD menu and
returning to video playback, see
page 111
Video settings
Please see the section “Video settings” on
page 98 for a description of the video
settings.
Switching the display of the PBC
(Playback Control) menu on/off, see
page 112
PBC menu, see page 112
Track list, see page 113
Audio settings
Please see the section “Audio settings” on
page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.
Opening the native video CD menu
Depending on the content of the video CD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Closing the native video CD menu and
returning to video playback
 Option 1: In the native video CD menu,
select the menu item Return to
Screen.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
After choosing an option, you will see
either the film or the PBC (Playback
Control) menu stored on the video CD.
What you see depends on the video CD
itself and also on whether the display of
the PBC menu is switched on or off.
A description of how to switch the
display on/off appears below.
111
DISC mode
Video CD playback
Switching the display of the PBC
(Playback Control) menu on/off
PBC menu
The PBC menu is stored on the video CD
itself. The individual tracks on the video CD
are accessed via the PBC menu. The
content and structure of the menu as well
as the available menu items will vary
depending on the video CD.
 Open the native video CD menu, see
section “Opening the native video CD
menu” on page 111.
Opening the PBC menu




Native video CD menu
 In the native video CD menu, select the
menu item PBC on.
Status display
Menu item PBC on
Native video CD menu
Depending on the previous status, the
display of the menu will be switched on
or off. The status display  changes
accordingly.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
This function is also available in the onscreen menu, see the section “Opening the
PBC menu or calling up the track list” on
page 116.
 Open the native video CD menu, see
section “Opening the native video CD
menu” on page 111.
When the display of the PBC menu is
switched on, PBC appears on the right in the
top status line.
The display of the PBC menu is
automatically switched off as soon as you
play another disc.

112
Native video CD menu
DISC mode
Video CD playback
 To open the PBC menu: In the native
video CD menu, select the menu item
PBC Menu.
You will see the PBC menu in fullscreen mode and the speller.
The speller  provides the following
functions:
Entering a track number from 0 to 99
Skipping tracks or changing the PBC
menu page
Entering track numbers
 Single-digit track number: In the
speller, highlight the desired digit by
turning   the controller  and press
the controller .








PBC menu
Individual tracks
Speller
Change to the next PBC page
Delete entered track number
Menu item OK
Change to the previous PBC page
Shows the selected speller menu item
The individual tracks are numbered in the
PBC menu .
 Two-digit track number: In the speller,
highlight the first digit by turning   the
controller  and press the
controller , then highlight the second
digit and again press the controller .
After you enter the second digit, the menu
item OK is automatically highlighted. You
can now confirm or clear the entry.
 To completely clear an entry: In the
speller, select the menu item  .
You can then enter a new number.
 To confirm an entry: In the speller,
select the menu item OK.
If the entry is not valid, you can enter a
new number after a short time.
If the entry is valid, the PBC menu is
automatically closed and the
corresponding track started.
Changing the PBC menu page
 To change to the next PBC menu
page: In the speller, select the menu
item .
 To change to the previous PBC
menu page: In the speller, select the
menu item .
Back to the native video CD menu
 Briefly press the  button.
Track list
This function is also available in the onscreen menu, see the section “Opening the
PBC menu or calling up the track list” on
page 116.
If a video CD contains several tracks, you
can use the track list to directly select a
specific track for playback.
113
DISC mode
Video CD playback
 Open the native video CD menu, see
section “Opening the native video CD
menu” on page 111.
In addition you can control the following
playback functions:



Native video CD menu
 To call up the track list: In the native
video CD menu, select the menu item
Track List.
The track list appears.
114
Play icon 
 for the track currently
playing
Track list
 To play a track: Select the desired
track.
On-screen menu
You can call up the following in the onscreen menu:
The native video CD menu, see
page 115.
Either the PBC menu or the track list,
see page 116.
Pausing or resuming playback, see
page 106
Skipping tracks forward/back, see
page 116
Fast forwarding/reversing, see
page 117
Depending on the content of the video CD
currently playing, certain menu items may
have no function even though they are
displayed.
Opening the on-screen menu
 During video playback, press the
controller .
The on-screen menu will be shown over
the video currently playing.
DISC mode
Video CD playback
 Option 3: Do nothing and wait until the
on-screen menu is automatically
closed.
Opening the native video CD menu
This function is also available outside the
on-screen menu, see the section “Opening
the native video CD menu” on page 111.









Pause/resume playback
Skip track back
Skip track forward
Open the native video CD menu
Close the on-screen menu
Open the PBC menu or call up the track
list
Fast reverse
Fast forward
Shows the selected menu item  - 
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 114.
The menu item Return to Screen described
on page page 111 is not part of the native
CD menu displayed on-screen over the
video currently playing.


On-screen menu
Menu item
Closing the on-screen menu
 Option 1: In the on-screen menu,
select the menu item  .
 Option 2: Briefly press the 
button.
Please see page 111 for a description
of the native video CD menu.
 To close the native video CD menu:
Briefly press the  button or do
nothing and wait until the menu is
automatically closed.
 To open the native video CD menu:
In the on-screen menu , select the
menu item .
The native video CD menu will be
shown over the video currently playing.
115
DISC mode
Video CD playback
Opening the PBC menu or calling up the
track list
These two functions are also available
outside the on-screen menu, see the
section “Opening the PBC menu” on
page 112 or the section “Track list” on
page 113.
To open the PBC menu, the display of the
PBC menu must be switched on in the
native video CD menu, see the section
“Native video CD menu” on page 111. To
call up the track list, the display of the PBC
menu must be switched off there.
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 114.


 In the on-screen menu , select the
menu item .
Either the PBC menu or the track list will
be shown over the video currently
playing, depending on whether the
display of the PBC menu is switched on
or off.
Please see page 112 for a description
of the PBC menu.
 To play a track: Select the desired
track in the track list.
Pausing or resuming playback
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 114.
Menu item
On-screen menu
The system will pause or resume
playback, depending on the previous
status.
Skipping tracks forward/back
These two functions are also available
outside the on-screen menu:

Menu item
On-screen menu
on the steering wheel, see page 111
in the PBC menu, see page 112
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 114.


116
 To pause or resume playback: In the
on-screen menu , select the menu
item .


On-screen menu
Skipping tracks back
Skipping tracks forward
DISC mode
Video CD playback
 In the on-screen menu, select the menu
item  or .
 To terminate fast forwarding/
reversing: Release the controller .
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the menu item selected.
Fast forwarding/reversing
 Open the on-screen menu, see section
“Opening the on-screen menu” on
page 114.



Fast reversing
Fast forwarding
On-screen menu
 To start fast forwarding/reversing: In
the on-screen menu, select the menu
item  or  and press and hold the
controller .
The system will start fast forwarding or
fast reversing depending on the
selection. The sound is muted during
this.
117
DISC mode
Video CD playback
118
AUX mode
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Signal sources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
iPod® playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
USB playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
AUX playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
119
AUX mode
General information
Trademarks
iPod® and iPhoneTM are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
Note on copyright
The audio files that you can create to store
on an iPod® mobile digital device or a USB
memory stick or that you can play using the
iPod® mobile digital device or from the USB
memory stick are generally copyrightprotected under applicable international
and national laws.
In many countries, the reproduction of
copyrighted material is not permitted, even
if only for personal use, without the express
prior consent of the copyright holder.
Please check the current copyright laws for
your country and comply with them.
These restrictions do not apply,
for example, to your own compositions and
recordings, or to recordings for which
authorization has been obtained from the
copyright holder.
120
AUX mode
Signal sources
Supported signal sources
You can connect the following signal
sources to the Driver Information System:
3rd to 5th generation iPod
iPod®
USB memory stick containing audio
files
AUX signal source (commercially
available audio/video signal source)
®
Mini
The system can only access the audio files
on an iPod® mobile digital device. Picture or
video files cannot be accessed.
It is possible to connect an iPhone
digital device to the system via
TM
mobile
In rare cases it is possible that an USB
memory stick is not recognized by the
system or may cause a malfunction. This is
not a fault. Some USB memory sticks do not
comply with the USB specifications.
Permissible file systems
Files that are not a standard MP3 or
WMA file may not be playable.
Encrypted USB memory sticks cannot
be recognized by the system.
Depending on the state of the USB
memory stick, it may not be recognized
by the system upon connection.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
to use the system as a hands-free unit.
The system does not support the music
playback interface (e.g. play list) of the
iPhoneTM mobile digital device.
Notes on USB memory sticks
Only use USB memory sticks of wellknown manufacturers. The use of other
USB memory sticks may result in
malfunction of the system.
Due to the constant changes of USB
products in the market and their
respective software, it can be possible
that some of the USB memory sticks
are not compatible with the system.
USB memory sticks whose Byte/Sector
is not 512Byte or 2048Byte is not
supported.
Some USB memory sticks may not
operate in the vehicle due to
compatibility issues. Please check that
it is compatible with the system in the
vehicle before usage.
The following file systems are permitted:
FAT12
FAT16
FAT32
File names and folder names
When storing audio files on the USB stick,
you can organize the files into folders.
Names must be assigned for the files as
well as for the folders.
The Driver Information System uses these
names for the corresponding display during
playback.
Empty folders or folders containing data
other than audio files in the supported
playback formats are not displayed by the
system.
The Driver Information System does not
support ID3 tags.
121
AUX mode
Signal sources
Please note the following when assigning
file names:
File names must contain at least one
character. They should not contain
more than one hundred characters as
the system cannot display names
exceeding one hundred characters.
File names must have the following
extensions:
MP3 files: mp3
WMA files: wma
A period must appear between the file
name and the extension.
Supported playback formats
Audio files with Digital Rights Management
(DRM) are not supported.
The Driver Information System supports
the playback of audio files in the following
formats:
MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
In everyday speech, this format has been
replaced by the designation “MP3”.
WMA
Supported bit and sampling rates
MP3 files:
Example of a correct MP3 file name:
Track 1.mp3
Fixed and variable bit rates from
8 kbps to 320 kbps
The system will not recognize the audio
files if there is no period between the file
name and the extension or if the extension
is missing.
Sampling rates up to 48 kHz
122
WMA files:
Fixed and variable bit rates from
8 kbps to 320 kbps
Sampling rates up to 48 kHz
Only use audio files with a bit rate of
128 kbps or higher and with a sampling rate
of 44.1 kHz or higher. Lower rates may
result in audibly impaired quality. This is
particularly true if the surround function is
activated.
Notes on AUX signal sources
It is possible that noise is heard during
playback when using an AUX signal source.
This is not a malfunction but system-related.
We recommend using the line-out of the
AUX signal source instead of the power
outlet (headphone or loudspeaker).
If the sound is distorted and no line-out is
available, reduce the volume level on the
AUX signal source itself.
AUX mode
Signal sources
Connecting signal sources
CAUTION
WARNING
If you connect and disconnect signal
sources when driving, you may be
distracted from the traffic situation, thus
increasing the accident hazard.
Please be careful that the USB socket is not
touched physically by any object. The
system may be damaged.
CAUTION
General information
If you connect an iPod® mobile digital
device, you cannot connect any other
signal sources.
If you connect a USB memory stick and/
or AUX signal source, you cannot
connect an iPod® mobile digital device.
Connecting sockets
A USB socket (labeled with “USB”) and a
3.5 mm (0.14") jack socket (labeled with
“AUX”) are provided for connecting signal
sources.
The system supports USB memory sticks
containing audio files. Any other USB
devices or anything else than music
playback is not supported.
Please pay attention to the following when
connecting an USB memory stick.
Only connect and disconnect signal sources
when the vehicle is stationary.
Notes on connecting an USB memory
stick
Any other USB devices such as hard discs
or other digital equipment may damage the
system as a result of excessive power
consumption.
When connecting and disconnecting a USB
memory stick many times in a short time, the
system may be damaged.


3,5 mm (0.14") jack socket
USB socket
(continued)
Connecting an iPod® mobile digital device
uses both sockets at the same time.
123
AUX mode
Signal sources
CAUTION
A USB hub or extension cable may
prevent the system from properly
analyzing the USB memory stick.
Please connect the USB memory stick
directly to system.
High capacity USB memory sticks may
be divided into more than one logical
drives. In this case, only the content of
the top logical drive is analyzed.
Therefore, please place the files to be
played in the top logical drive of the
USB memory stick.
(continued)
Using the system’s USB interface to charge,
heat or connect any other USB devices
except USB memory sticks may decrease
the system performance or may damage the
system.
When the USB memory stick is connected
to the system when starting the vehicle, the
USB memory stick may be damaged.
USB memory sticks should be disconnected
to the system when starting the vehicle.
When connecting or disconnecting the
USB memory stick, please be careful of
the static electricity.
Noise may occur when connecting an
USB memory stick.
The time required to analyze a
connected USB memory stick may vary
depending on the stick, stick capacity,
or the file structure of the stick. This
does not mean that the system is
malfunctioning, so please wait.
The system’s USB support shall not be
used for anything else then music
playback.
124
Some USB memory sticks use a
separate application to store files into
the stick. This is treated in the same
way as the previous case.
Connection of MP3 player, mobile
phone, digital camera, or any other
devices that can be connected to a USB
port that are not recognized as
Removable Disk may not operate
properly.
Any other USB memory stick than the
standard Metal Cover Type is not
guaranteed to operate properly.
Operation of HDD type, CF, and SD
Memory is not guaranteed.
USB memory sticks acting as an
adapter such as for SD type and CF
type may not be recognized by the
system.
USB memories whose connector part
causes connection failure due to USB
HDD or physical design of the device
connector are not guaranteed to work.
(e.g. i-stick type).
Notes on connecting an iPod® mobile
digital device
Please pay attention to the following when
connecting an iPod®:
To connect an iPod® you will need an
appropriate connecting cable. You can
buy this as original accessory at your
Hyundai dealer. Connector cable for PC
provided by Apple or other
manufacturers may not operate
properly and may cause malfunction.
The connecting cable available as
original accessory at your Hyundai
dealer simultaneously occupies the
USB socket and the AUX socket.
When connecting the iPod® cable, push
the cable connector fully so that the
signal is not disrupted.
AUX mode
Signal sources
Connection of the iPod connection
cable without the iPod® connected at
the other end will still trigger the system
to change to AUX mode. In such case,
noise may occur due to an open end
connection. Please disconnect and
store the iPod® connector cable in a
safe place when iPod® is not in use.
If the Hyundai logo persists on the
iPod® display when disconnecting the
iPod® from the system, please upgrade
to the latest iPod® firmware.
®
Notes on connecting an AUX signal
source
You can connect an audio or video
signal source to the AUX socket using a
commercially available cable with a 3.5
mm (0.14") jack.
AUX operates properly only when the
external audio or video signal source
connected is operational.
Connection of the AUX connection
cable without the AUX signal source
connected at the other end will still
trigger the system to change to AUX
mode. In such case, noise may occur
due to an open end connection. Please
disconnect and store the AUX
connection cable in a safe place when
the AUX signal source is not in use.
When the power of the AUX signal
source is connected to the vehicle's
power jack, noise may occur on the
display with some devices. In this case,
disconnect from the power jack and use
the internal power source of the device.
After connecting an iPod® mobile digital
device or an USB memory stick
If PHONE, INFO or Navigation mode is
displayed before connecting the signal
source, the display does not switch to AUX
mode automatically.
But AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback of the respective
signal source starts if it contains playable
files.
If DISC, FM/AM or XM® Satellite Radio
mode is displayed before connecting the
signal source, the display switches
automatically to AUX mode.
AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback of the respective
signal source starts if it contains playable
files.
After connecting an AUX audio signal
source
If PHONE, INFO or Navigation mode is
displayed before connecting an AUX audio
signal source, the display does not switch
to AUX mode automatically.
But AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback starts as soon as the
signal source transmits an audio signal.
If DISC, FM/AM or XM® Satellite Radio
mode is displayed before connecting the
AUX audio signal source, the display
switches automatically to AUX mode.
AUX is automatically the active audio
source and playback starts as soon as the
signal source transmits an audio signal.
125
AUX mode
Signal sources
After connecting an AUX video signal
source
Independent of the displayed mode before
connecting an AUX video signal source,
the display switches automatically to AUX
mode as soon as the signal source
transmits a video signal.
AUX is automatically the active audio
source, as soon as an AUX video signal
source is connected. It does not matter
whether the signal source transmits an
audio signal or not.
126
AUX mode
General operation
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
 Option 2: Press the  button.
The system will switch to either AUX or
DISC mode.
If the system switches to DISC mode:
Switching to AUX mode
 Option 1: Connect a signal source to
the system, see the section “Signal
sources” on page 121.
This option works if you are connecting an
iPod® mobile digital device, an USB
memory stick or an AUX audio/video signal
source.
If you are connecting an iPod® mobile
digital device, playback of the currently
active track in the iPod® will be
continued.
If you are connecting an USB memory
stick and it contains playable files, USB
playback will be started.
If you are connecting an AUX signal
source, you will hear or see the signal
source, on condition that playback has
been started on the signal source itself.
 Press the  button again.
 Option 3: Press the  button on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
system switches to AUX mode.
Opening the AUX main menu
 From iPod® or USB playback: Press
and hold the  button.
 From AUX video playback: Press
the  button.
In both cases, the AUX main menu
appears.
If Navigation, INFO or PHONE is the active
mode, switching to AUX mode on the
steering wheel does not switch the display,
only the audio source will be switched
accordingly. If you want to switch the display
also, you must use the  button on the
control panel.
After choosing option 2 or 3, you will hear or
see the last active signal source if the
following conditions are met:
The signal source is still connected.
The signal source contains playable
files.
Playback has been started on the signal
source itself (AUX signal source only).
This sample illustration shows the AUX main
menu during USB playback


AUX main menu with the available
signal sources
AUX content area
127
AUX mode
General operation
Selecting a signal source
You can only select a signal source if both
signal sources, USB memory stick and AUX
signal source, are connected at the same
time. If an iPod® mobile digital device is
connected you cannot connect an other
signal source. In this case, selecting a
signal source is not possible.
 Open the AUX main menu, see section
“Opening the AUX main menu” on
page 127.
This sample illustration shows the AUX main
menu during USB playback

AUX main menu with the available
signal sources
128
 Select the desired signal source in the
AUX main menu.
The system will switch to the selected
signal source.
AUX mode
iPod playback
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Accessing iPod® main/submenu items and
tracks can be delayed depending on file
names and sizes.
Starting playback
The
searching process can be
different depending on iPod® models.
The actual order of playback of iPod®
content on the system may be different from
actual iPod®.
iPod®
When iPod® itself shuts down due to an
internal failure, please use iPod® after
making a reset (refer to iPod® operation
manual).
 Option 1: Switch to AUX mode and, if
necessary, open the AUX main menu
and select the iPod® mobile digital
device as the signal source, see section
“General operation” from page 127.
 Option 2: Connect an iPod® mobile
digital device, see the section
“Connecting signal sources” on
page 123.
In both cases, playback of the currently
active track in the iPod® will be
continued.
As soon as you select another track, the
position of that track in the iPod® structure is
known to the system and the points
described above are no longer valid.
AUX main menu during iPod®
playback
The position of the active track in the iPod®
structure is unknown to the system after the
iPod® has been just connected or after the
system was switched off and on with iPod®
still connected.
Due to the unknown position, the following
points are valid:
In the Options menu, the menu item
Now Playing has no function.
The system will display the iPod® menu
in the content area, instead of the track
list with the track currently playing as
described below.
The top category of the track currently
playing will not be shown in the lower
statusline as described below.
If you navigate through the iPod® menu,
the track currently playing will not be
marked with the play icon  as
described below.







Currently active main function
AUX main menu with list of signal
sources
Currently active entertainment source
Track currently playing
Content area with track list
Top category of the track currently
playing
Play icon  for the track currently
playing
129
AUX mode
iPod playback
iPod® menu
The
menu is nearly the same as the
“MUSIC” menu on the iPod® itself. The
Driver Information System cannot access
any of the other iPod® menus.
iPod®
Opening the
iPod®
 With the content area active, press
the  button repeatedly until the
iPod® menu appears.
The iPod searching process can be
different depending on iPod® models.
®
The iPod® menu has eight main menu
items in total, each of which contains at
least one submenu item, see the
following list.
menu
 To activate the content area: Push
 the controller  until the content
area is active.
Main menu item Submenu items
Playlists > List of Playlists
> List of Tracks
Artists > List of Artists
> List of Albums
> List of Tracks
Albums > List of Albums
> List of Tracks
You can tell the active content area by
the blue frame around it.
Songs > List of Tracks
Podcasts > List of Podcasts
Genres > List of Genres
> List of Artists
> List of Albums
> List of Tracks

iPod® menu
Composers > List of Composers
> List of Albums


Blue frame
Content area
> List of Tracks
Audiobooks > List of Audiobooks
The contents of the submenu items
“List of...” are depending on the connected
iPod®.
130
AUX mode
iPod playback
®
Pausing or resuming playback
Navigating within the iPod menu
Navigating within the iPod® menu can be
delayed depending on file names and sizes.
Navigating forwards
 Select a menu item in the iPod® menu.
If the selected item is the last submenu
item, the playable track list will be
displayed.
Selecting a list item automatically
results in the corresponding track being
played.

Options menu
Navigating backwards
 Skipping to the track: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Now
Playing.
 Press the  button.
Abbreviated menu items in the iPod®
menu
Skipping directly to the track currently
playing
Menu items in the iPod® menu may be
displayed in abbreviated form. This is
indicated by the three dots “…” at the end
of a menu item.
 To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, push  the controller .


Play icon 
Track currently playing (highlighted)
Option 1
Pausing playback
 In the iPod® menu, highlight the track
currently playing and press the
controller .
The play icon  will change to the
pause icon .
131
AUX mode
iPod playback
Resuming playback
 In the iPod menu, highlight the track
currently playing once again and press
the controller .
®
Playback will be resumed and the
pause icon  will change to the play
icon .
Option 2
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Pause.
Playback will be paused and the
Options menu will be closed
automatically.
Resuming playback
 To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, push  the controller .
Pausing playback
Selecting a track
Selecting a track in the iPod® menu
 Navigate through the iPod® menu and
select the desired track.
Refer to the section “Navigating within the
iPod® menu” on page 131 to find out how to
navigate through the iPod® menu.
Skipping tracks forward/back
“Skip track forward” skips to the next track.
“Skip track back” skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 3 seconds. If the track
has been playing for less than 3 seconds, it
will skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
 To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, push  the controller .
Using the steering wheel

Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Play.

Options menu
132
Playback will be resumed and the
Options menu will be closed
automatically.
 Briefly press the  or  button on
the steering wheel.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.
AUX mode
iPod playback
Using the central control panel
Fast forwarding/reversing
On the steering wheel
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push  the controller .
On the central control panel
 To start forwarding: Press and hold
the  button.
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push  the controller .
 To start reversing: Press and hold
the  button.
 To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the  or  button.
Repeating tracks
This function will keep repeating a track until
it is cancelled.

Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Next Track or Prev. Track.
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the selected menu
item.

Options menu
 To open the Options menu: In the
iPod® menu, highlight the desired track
and push  the controller .
 To start forwarding: In the Options
menu, select the menu item FF and
press and hold the controller .
 To start reversing: In the Options
menu, select the menu item REW and
press and hold the controller .
 To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the controller .


Status display
Options menu
133
AUX mode
iPod playback
 To switch the repeat function on/off:
In the Options menu, select the menu
item Repeat Track.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display  changes accordingly.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
Random setting
Random view display
The random setting switches the shuffle
song function of the iPod® mobile digital
device on or off.
Switching the function on
 In the iPod® menu, highlight any track
and push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
When the function is switched on, the
icon
additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.


The function switches off automatically
when you:

select another track in the iPod® menu,

switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,

switch the system off and back on
again.

Switching the function off


Status display ( = function switched
off)
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Random.
The function will be switched on and the
random view display appears.
134
Random view display
Icon
for random function activated
Blinking pause icon (only visible if
playback is paused)
Artist name
Album title
Track currently playing
 In the random view display, push  the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
AUX mode
iPod playback
Due to the unknown position, the following
points are valid:


Status display (Display  = function
switched on)
Options menu
In the Options menu, the menu item
Now Playing has no function.
The system will display the iPod® menu
in the content area, instead of the track
list with the track currently playing as
described in the section “AUX main
menu during iPod® playback” on
page 129.
The top category of the track currently
playing will not be shown in the lower
statusline as described in the section
“AUX main menu during iPod®
playback” on page 129.
If you navigate through the iPod® menu,
the track currently playing will not be
marked with the play icon  as
described in the section “AUX main
menu during iPod® playback” on
page 129.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Random.
The function will be switched off and the
iPod® top menu appears.
After switching the function off, the position
of the active track in the iPod® data
structure is unknown to the system as long
as you not select a track on the Driver
Information System.
The random function is switched off
automatically when you switch to a different
audio or video signal source, for example to
FM, or when you switch the system off and
back on again.
Audio settings
Please see the section “Audio settings” on
page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.
As soon as you select a track on the Driver
Information System, the position of that
track in the iPod® structure is known to the
system and the points described above are
no longer valid.
135
AUX mode
USB playback
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
AUX main menu during USB
playback
Accessing folders and tracks or scrolling
through lists can be delayed depending on
file names and sizes.
The system uses the names assigned
during storage of the audio files on the USB
memory stick for the track/folder names
displayed in the AUX content area . Any
ID3 tags in the audio files will be ignored.
If a track or folder name is too long, the
system will display it in abbreviated form.
This is indicated by the three dots “…” at
the end of the name.
Starting playback
 Option 1: Connect a USB stick, see the
section “Connecting signal sources” on
page 123.
 Option 2: Switch to AUX mode and, if
necessary, open the AUX main menu
and select the USB stick as the signal
source, see section “General operation”
from page 127.
Displaying the track and folder names







Currently active main function
AUX main menu with list of signal
sources
Currently active entertainment source
Track currently playing
AUX content area with track/folder list
Name of the currently active folder
Play icon  for the track currently
playing

Abreviated track name
If this happens, you can call up a details
display if you want to see the complete
track name or you can call up a play info
display if you want to see further
information.
136
AUX mode
USB playback
Calling up a details or play info display
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
the desired track or folder and push 
the controller .
The Options menu appears.

Details display
 To close the details display: Press
the controller .

Options menu
 To call up the details display: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Details.
The details display containing the
complete file name appears.
 To call up the play info display: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Play Info.
The play info display of the track
currently playing appears, containing
several information.





Current folder name
Current file name
Current song title
Current album title
Current artist name
In order to display the current song title,
album title and artist name, these
information must be stored as ID3 tags
inside the MP3 or WMA track.
If you select another track or if the system
plays the next track, the play info display will
not be closed and it will be updated
automatically.
 To close the play info display: Press
the controller .
137
AUX mode
USB playback
Selecting folders and tracks
Folders can only be selected if the audio
files were organized into folders when they
were stored on the USB memory stick.
 To play a track: Select the desired
track.
Skipping tracks forward/back
“Skip track forward” skips to the next track.
“Skip track back” skips to the beginning
of the current track, if the track has been
playing for more than 10 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
10 seconds, it will skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
 Briefly press the  or  button on
the steering wheel.





Menu item for the folder change
function
Folder
Play icon  for track currently playing
Track
Highlighted track
 To switch to the next folder level up:
Select the menu item .
The display will change accordingly.
 To open a folder: Select the desired
folder.
You will see the tracks stored in this
folder.
138
The system will execute the track skip
corresponding to the button pressed.
Fast forwarding/reversing
On the central control panel
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
any track and push  the controller .

Options menu
 To start forwarding: In the Options
menu, select the menu item FF and
press and hold the controller .
 To start reversing: In the Options
menu, select the menu item REW and
press and hold the controller .
 To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the controller .
On the steering wheel
 To start forwarding: Press and hold
the  button.
 To start reversing: Press and hold
the  button.
 To terminate forwarding/reversing:
Release the  or  button.
AUX mode
USB playback
Repeating tracks or folders
The repeat track function switches off
automatically when you select another
track.
This function will keep repeating a track or
folder until it is cancelled. Repetition of
folders is only possible if the tracks are
organized into folders. Tracks in subfolders
within the folder to be repeated will be
ignored.
The repeat folder function switches off
automatically when you select a track in
another folder.
Both functions are switching off
automatically when you:
 Highlight the desired track or folder.


Status display
Options menu
 To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Repeat Track or Repeat Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display  changes accordingly.



Folder
Highlighted track
Track
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
Random play
Switching random play of all tracks on/
off
Random play of all tracks plays all tracks on
the USB memory stick in random order.
 Highlight the track currently playing.
When the function is switched on, the
icon
(repeat track) or
(repeat folder) additionally appears on
the right in the top status line.
139
AUX mode
USB playback
 To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Random Track.
 Highlight the desired folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display  accordingly.

Play icon  for track currently playing
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
When the function is switched on, the
icon
additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.

Highlighted folder
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Switching random play within a specific
folder on/off


Status display
Options menu
140
Random play within a specific folder plays
all tracks in a specific folder in random
order. Tracks in subfolders within the
specific folder will be ignored.


Status display
Options menu
AUX mode
USB playback
 To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Random Folder.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display  changes accordingly.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
Scan function
This function plays about 10 seconds of
each track on the USB memory stick and
then skips to the next track.
 Highlight the track from which you want
the function to start.
When the function is switched on, the
icon
additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.


 To switch the function on/off: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Scan.
The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,

switch the system off and back on
again.
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Status display
Options menu
Highlighted track
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be switched on or off. The
status display  changes accordingly.
Display  = function switched on
Display  = function switched off
When the function is switched on, the
icon
additionally appears on the
right in the top status line.
141
AUX mode
USB playback
The function switches off automatically
when you:
select any track,
switch to a different audio or video
signal source, for example to FM,
switch the system off and back on
again.
It also switches off automatically when it
reaches the track where it started.
Audio settings
Please see the section “Audio settings”
on page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.
142
AUX mode
AUX playback
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Automatic video lock-out
Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
The system switches the picture back on as
soon as the gear stick is in position P.
Audio signal source (AUX audio source
only):
The AUX playback sound is not affected by
the switch-off.
Starting playback
Before starting playback, make sure that the
correct video standard is set, see the
section “AUX video standard” on page 146.
In the interest of safety, AUX video
playback is only possible if the gear stick is
in position P.
 Connect an AUX signal source, see the
section “Connecting signal sources” on
page 123.
Else you will see a corresponding message
in the display.
 Start playback on the AUX signal
source.
Video signal source:
 Open the AUX main menu and, if
necessary, select the AUX signal
source as the signal source in the AUX
main menu, see section “General
operation” from page 127.
Depending on the AUX signal source, you
will see one of the following full-screen
displays.
143
AUX mode
AUX playback
Opening/closing the AUX main
menu during playback
Opening the AUX main menu and
closing the AUX full-screen display
 Option 2: In the AUX main menu,
select the menu item AUX.
The AUX full-screen display appears.
 Press the  button or the
controller .
The AUX main menu appears.
 In the AUX main menu, select the menu
item Settings.
A selection menu appears.
Audio settings
Please see the section “Audio settings” on
page 33 for a description of the audio
settings.


AUX main menu
Menu item AUX
Closing the AUX main menu and
opening the AUX full-screen display
 Option 1: Press the  button.
144
Video settings
Opening the Video Settings menu
 During AUX video playback, press and
hold the  button until the AUX main
menu appears.

Selection menu
AUX mode
AUX playback
 In the selection menu, select the menu
item Video.
The Video Settings menu appears.
Closing the Video Settings menu
 Option 1: Push  the controller 
once.
 Option 2: Briefly press the 
button.
Aspect ratio
 Open the Video Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Video Settings
menu” on page 144.

Icon  for currently active setting
 To set the aspect ratio: Select the
desired setting.

Video Settings menu
Brightness, color and contrast
The Video Settings menu includes the
following functions:
 Open the Video Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Video Settings
menu” on page 144.
Aspect ratio, see page 145
Brightness, color and contrast, see
page 145
AUX video standard, see page 146

Video reset, see page 147
 To open the Aspect Ratio menu: In
the Video Settings menu, select the
menu item Aspect Ratio.
Video Settings menu
The Aspect Ratio menu appears.

Video Settings menu
145
AUX mode
AUX playback
 To open the desired menu: In the
Video Settings menu, select either the
menu item Brightness, Color or
Contrast.
The corresponding menu appears.
 To close the menu: Press the
controller  or briefly press the 
button.
 To open the AUX Video Standard
menu: In the Video Settings menu,
select the menu item Video Standard.
The corresponding menu appears.
AUX video standard
This function lets you adapt the AUX video
input of the system to the video standard of
the AUX video signal source. The video
standards NTSC and PAL are available.
 Open the Video Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Video Settings
menu” on page 144.

The illustration shows the brightness setting


 To set the video standard: Select the
desired setting.
Scale for the brightness setting
Indicator
The position of the indicator on the
scale  shows the current setting.
 Turn   the controller  until the
desired setting is reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
146
Icon  for currently active setting

Video Settings menu
AUX mode
AUX playback
Video reset
You can use the video reset function to
reset the following settings to their factory
settings:
Aspect ratio
Brightness
Color
Contrast
AUX video standard
 In the Video Settings menu, select the
menu item Reset Video Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the video settings.
 Open the Video Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Video Settings
menu” on page 144.
 Select Yes or No.
The system will or will not reset the
video settings, depending on the
answer you select.

Video Settings menu
147
AUX mode
AUX playback
148
PHONE
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
PHONE main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone 153
Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call . . . . . . 173
Functions during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Special functions for two calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
149
PHONE
General information
Safety instructions
WARNING
If you use the phone functions when driving,
you may be distracted from the traffic
situation, thus increasing the accident
hazard.
Only use the phone functions when the
vehicle is stationary.
When using the phone in the vehicle, the
driver must observe all the laws and
regulations of the relevant country.
For your own safety, make all calls when
driving using the hands-free unit. When you
use the hands-free unit, concentrate on
your driving, close all windows and avoid
background noise.
If you do not wish to use the hands-free
unit, stop or park your car when using the
phone. Do not stop and park in areas where
this is not permitted.
General information
Basic technical prerequisites for mobile
phones
If operation of phones during driving is
legal, only do so when the traffic conditions
permit this.
If you use a mobile phone with the system,
the system will also act, among other
things, as a hands-free unit.
Otherwise, your attention may be
distracted from the road traffic, resulting in
an accident.
To use a mobile phone with the system,
it must be equipped with Bluetooth®
wireless technology and with the
following Bluetooth® 2.0 profiles.
The Driver Information System features an
integrated hands-free unit. You can use
this unit in combination with a mobile phone
connected with the system.
150
Hands-free profile (HFP)
Phonebook access profile (PBAP)
Bluetooth® wireless technology is a
technology for wireless data communication
over short distances of up to approx.
10 metres. The data exchange itself is
controlled using profiles. The hands-free
profiles enable the Driver Information
System to be used as a hands-free unit. The
phonebook access profile enable the Driver
Information System to download the
phonebook data from the mobile phone.
To be able to use a mobile phone with
the system, the mobile phone must be
connected with the system using the above
mentioned technology. Please see the
section “Pairing/connecting/disconnecting
a mobile phone” on page 153 for a detailed
description of how to connect the mobile
phone with the system.
The system does not support all mobile
phones equipped with Bluetooth® wireless
technology.
PHONE
General information
Interruptions to the connection while
driving
Functional restrictions
Interruptions to the connection may occur
if:
Under the following circumstances, the
phone functions may not or may not yet be
useable:
there is inadequate network coverage,
If it is not yet logged into a network.
you are switching from one transmitting/
receiving station (cell) to another and
there is no voice channel available in
this cell.
If the mobile phone is not connected
with the Driver Information System.
Displaying phone numbers and names
During a phone call
During a phone call, the sound of the active
audio or video source is muted.
The Driver Information System can display
the phone number and name of the caller
when there is a call incoming, for example,
but also in other menus and displays.
For phone numbers to be displayed, the
caller must transmit their phone number.
This also applies to the name display. The
following must additionally be stored in the
phonebook for this:
the phone number of the caller,
the name.
The phone number must be stored exactly
as the caller transmits it.
151
PHONE
PHONE main menu
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Opening the PHONE main menu
 Option 1: Press the  button.
Either the PHONE main menu or the
INFO main menu appears.
Available functions
If the INFO main menu appears:
The following functions are available in the
PHONE main menu:
Calling up the menu for entering a
phone number, see the section
“Entering a phone number” on
page 173.
Calling up the call history list (missed,
received and dialed calls), see the
section “Call history list” on page 176
Calling up the phonebook, see the
section “Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
Calling up the device list for pairing or
connecting a mobile phone, see the
section “Pairing a mobile phone” on
page 153 or the section “Connecting a
mobile phone” on page 156.
Calling up PHONE settings, see the
section “Calling up the Settings menu”
on page 167.
152
 Press the  button once more.
The PHONE main menu appears,
see illustration below.
 Option 2: Press the  button on the
steering wheel.
The PHONE main menu appears.

PHONE main menu
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
General
Before you can use a mobile phone with the
Driver Information System, it must be
paired and connected with the system via
Bluetooth®.
Please refer to the section “Basic technical
prerequisites for mobile phones” on
page 150.
A precondition for pairing and connecting is
that Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone.
Activating Bluetooth® on the mobile
phone
 Proceed as described in the user
manual for your mobile phone.
Pairing a mobile phone
Please refer also to the section “Basic
technical prerequisites for mobile phones”
on page 150.
You can pair a maximum of 5 mobile phones
with the system. After pairing, the system
will connect the mobile phone automatically,
which causes disconnection of any mobile
phone already connected. If the connection
is not succesful, the autoconnection
process will be initiated, on condition that
the autoconnection function is switched on,
see section “Switching autoconnection
function on/off” on page 167. The
autoconnection process attempts to
reconnect with the last mobile phone
connected.


PHONE main menu
Menu item Connect Phone
 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.
153
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone


Menu item Register New Phone
Device list
 In the device list, select the menu item
Register New Phone.
If there are 5 mobile phones already
paired with the system, you will see an
appropriate message.
You must delete at least one mobile
phone pairing in order to be able to pair
a new mobile phone with the system.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
 To delete a mobile phone pairing:
See the section “Deleting a pairing”
on page 164.
If there are fewer than 5 mobile phones
paired with the system and another
phone is already connected to the
system, you will see a message
prompting you to disconnect the phone.
154
 To cancel pairing: Select No.
Pairing will be cancelled, and the device
list appears again.
 To continue pairing: Select Yes.
Pairing will be continued and you will
see the following message.
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Pairing includes two steps: the mobile
phone's search for the Driver
Information System and the
subsequent entry of the passkey on
the mobile phone.
The default value of the passkey is 1234.
You can change the passkey, see section
“Changing the passkey” on page 171.
There are 2 minutes of time available
for entering the passkey.
 Start the search for the Driver
Information System on the mobile
phone. Proceed as described in the
user manual for your mobile phone.
The Bluetooth® name of the Driver
Information System is GENESIS, it is
displayed under this name on the
mobile phone.
 Start pairing on the mobile phone.
When the mobile phone asks for the
passkey, enter it on the mobile phone.
The Driver Information System displays the
current passkey, see previously illustration.
The default value of the passkey is 1234.
For the future, it is possible to change the
passkey, see section “Changing the
passkey” on page 171.



Bluetooth® name of the Driver
Information System
Passkey
Remaining time for entry of the passkey
Some mobile phones make a request at the
end of the pairing, if the connection should
be made automatically or requested each
time.
If the passkey has not been correctly
entered, you will see a prompt.
The system will abort entry of the
passkey if the 2 minutes of time are
running out without the passkey being
entered.
If the passkey has been correctly entered,
the mobile phone is paired with the system
and automatically connected with the
system. You will see an appropriate status
display that automatically closes after a
short time.
155
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
 To terminate passkey entry: Select
No.
 To enter the passkey again: Select
Yes and enter the passkey once more.
If connection is not possible despite the
passkey having been entered correctly,
you will see an appropriate message.
If you wish to make another connection
attempt with the newly paired mobile phone,
you must do so manually, see the section
“Connecting manually” on page 156.
Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile
phone.
Automatic connection function of the
system is switched on, see the section
“Switching autoconnection function on/
off” on page 167.
Connecting a mobile phone
Please refer also to the section “Basic
technical prerequisites for mobile phones”
on page 150.
If no connection is possible:
If there is a certain mobile phone set as
default for the autoconnection function,
the system will attempt a connection to
this mobile phone only.
Otherwise the system will attempt a
connection with another available
mobile phone already previously paired
with the system.
The following connection options are
available:
Connecting automatically, see
page 156
Connecting manually, see page 156
Connecting automatically
Even if the connection was not possible, the
mobile phone is now paired with the system.
This message will close automatically and
the system will attempt to connect with the
last mobile phone that was connected. The
autoconnection function must be switched
on for this, see section “Switching
autoconnection function on/off” on
page 167.
156
After the system is switched on, it
automatically attempts to reconnect with
the last mobile phone connected. The
following conditions must be met for this:
The mobile phone is switched on and is
within the reception range of the
system.
The mobile phone is still paired with the
system.
For information on the default mobile phone
for the autoconnection function, please refer
to the section “Setting the default phone” on
page 163.
Connecting manually
Calling up the device list
 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Connecting a phone (Option 1)
 If the desired mobile phone is not in
the list: Pair the mobile phone with the
system, see the section “Pairing a
mobile phone” on page 153.
 If the desired mobile phone is in the
list: Select the mobile phone.


PHONE main menu
Menu item Connect Phone
 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
The list will be empty if there have not yet
been any mobile phones paired with the
system.
The icons before the list entries indicate
the status of the respective mobile
phone.





Icon
= Mobile phone is paired with
the system and currently connected
Icon
= Mobile phone is paired with
the system, but not currently connected
Phone name
Device list
Connection status icon
Icon
= A mobile phone is connected
Icon
= No mobile phone is
connected
You can change the phone name, see the
section “Renaming a phone” on page 161.
The system will start the connecting
process, see section “Connecting
process” on page 158.
Connecting a phone (Option 2)
 If the desired mobile phone is not in
the list: Pair the mobile phone with the
system, see the section “Pairing a
mobile phone” on page 153.
 If the desired mobile phone is in the
device list: Highlight the mobile phone
in the device list.
 Push  the controller  once.
The Options menu appears.
157
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
If connection is successful, the icons in the
device list and the icon in the bottom status
line will change accordingly.
For information on that, please refer to the
section “Connecting manually” on
page 156.


Options menu
Connect Phone menu item
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Connect Phone.
The system will start the connecting
process.
Connecting process
Only one mobile phone can be connected
with the system.
Option 1: If another mobile phone is
already connected, you will be prompted to
confirm that you wish to disconnect it.
158
 Select Yes to disconnect it.
The connection process starts, see next
illustration.
Option 2: If no another mobile phone is
already connected, the connection process
starts immediately, see the following
illustration.
If connection is not successful, you will see
the message Connection Failed followed
by the phone name. The message
disappears after a short time.
Terminating a connection
If you terminate a connection, the
autoconnection process (see page 156) will
be suspended until the system is switched
off/on or until a phone will be connected
manually (see page 156).
Calling up the device list
 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone



Phone name
Device list
Connection status icon
Icon
= A mobile phone is connected
Icon
= No mobile phone is
connected
You can change the phone name, see the
section “Renaming a phone” on page 161.
Disconnecting a phone (Option 1)


PHONE main menu
Menu item Connect Phone
 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
 Select the desired connected mobile
phone in the device list.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to terminate the connection,
see section “Confirming disconnecting”
on page 160.


Options menu
Disconnect Phone menu item
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Disconnect Phone.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to disconnect the mobile
phone.
Disconnecting a phone (Option 2)
 Highlight the desired connected mobile
phone in the device list.
 Push  the controller  once.
The Options menu appears.


Icon
= Mobile phone is paired with
the system and currently connected
Icon
= Mobile phone is paired with
the system, but not currently connected
159
PHONE
Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a mobile phone
Confirming disconnecting
 Select Yes.
The connection will be terminated.
Dropped connection
The connection between the mobile phone
and the system can drop, for example if the
mobile phone is switched off or if it is no
longer within the reception range of the
system.
If the connection between the mobile
phone and the system drops, you will see
an appropriate message.
160
The system will automatically attempt to reestablish the connection, provided that the
automatic connection function is still
switched on, see section “Switching
autoconnection function on/off” on
page 167.
PHONE
Options
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Renaming a phone
The phone names shown in the device list
generally originate from the mobile phones
themselves. You can, however, also change
the names.
Options menu
You can open the Options menu for each
mobile phone shown in the device list.
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.
The Options menu includes the following
functions:

PHONE main menu
Connect Phone menu item
Renaming a phone, see page 161
Setting the default phone, see
page 163
Connecting/Disconnecting a mobile
phone, see page 163
Deleting a pairing, see page 164
Deleting all pairings, see page 165

Showing details, see page 166
 Highlight the desired mobile phone in
the device list .

 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Connect Phone.
The device list appears.
Calling up the device list
Device list
 Push  the controller .
 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.
The Options menu appears.

Device list
161
PHONE
Options


Confirm entry
Delete all characters in the input field







Menu item Rename Phone
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Rename Phone.
The input menu appears.
Delete the last character in the input
field 
Enter space
Switch character set
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the speller 
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the speller  and the area
with the menu items  and .
 To move from one area to another:
Push   the controller .
 To enter a character: In the speller,
highlight a character by turning   the
controller and press the
controller .
The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
 To switch character set: In the speller,
select one of the menu items .



Input field with characters already
entered
Currently highlighted character
Speller
162
The corresponding character set
appears in the speller.
 To delete the last character in the
input field: In the speller, select the
menu item .
The last character entered is deleted.
 To delete all characters in the input
field: From the speller, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
speller and enter characters as
described previously.
 To confirm an entry: From the speller,
push  the controller  and select the
menu item OK.
PHONE
Options
Setting the default phone
With this function you can set a certain
mobile phone as default for the
autoconnection process. When set, the
autoconnection process will attempt a
connection to the set mobile phone only.
When not set, the autoconnection process
will attempt a connection with another
available mobile phone already previously
paired with the system.
 Highlight the desired mobile phone in
the device list.
 Push  the controller  once.
The Options menu appears.



Status display
Menu item Set as Default
Options menu
The status display  shows whether the
mobile phone is already set as the default
phone or not.

Depending on the previous status, the
mobile phone will be set or cancelled as
the default phone. The status display
 changes accordingly.
You can set only one mobile phone as the
default phone. Setting a mobile phone as
the default phone cancels the previously
default setting of a different mobile phone.
For information on the autoconnection
process please refer to section “Connecting
automatically” on page 156.
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.
 To set or to cancel a mobile phone as
the default phone: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Set as
Default.
Display  = Mobile phone is set as the
default phone
Display  = Mobile phone is not set as
the default phone
Connecting/Disconnecting a mobile
phone
Both functions are also available outside the
Options menu, see sections “Connecting
manually” on page 156 and “Terminating a
connection” on page 158.
If you disconnect a mobile phone, the
autoconnection process (see page 156) will
be suspended until the system is switched
off/on or until a phone will be connected
manually (see page 156).
Device list
163
PHONE
Options
Connecting
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.


Device list
 Continue as described in the section
“Connecting a phone (Option 2)” on
page 157.
Disconnecting
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.
Device list
 Continue as described in the section
“Disconnecting a phone (Option 2)” on
page 159.

Device list
 Highlight the desired mobile phone in
the device list.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
Deleting a pairing
This function deletes the pairing, the
phonebook data and the call history of a
mobile phone stored in the system, except
for the currently connected mobile phone.
If you want to delete this too, first you must
disconnect the mobile phone, see section
“Terminating a connection” on page 158.
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.


164
Options menu
Menu item Delete Pairing
PHONE
Options
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete Pairing.
After the pairing is deleted, the system
will automatically search for another
mobile phone already paired with the
system. If it finds one, this mobile phone
will be automatically connected with the
system.
The menu item Delete Pairing cannot be
selected if the highlighted mobile phone is
connected with the system.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the pairing.
The Options menu appears.
Deleting all pairings
This function deletes all pairings, all
phonebook data and all call history lists of all
mobile phones stored in the Driver
Information System, except for the currently
connected mobile phone.
If you want to delete this too, first you must
disconnect the mobile phone, see section
“Terminating a connection” on page 158.
 Select Yes
 In the device list, highlight a mobile
phone push  the controller .
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.
The pairing and the phonebook data of
the mobile phone will be deleted.


Options menu
Menu item Delete All Pairings
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All Pairings.
The menu item Delete All Pairings cannot
be selected if the device list does not
contain any mobile phones.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all pairings.
Before you can reconnect this mobile
phone with the system you must pair it
with the system again, see the section
“Pairing a mobile phone” on page 153.

Device list
165
PHONE
Options
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The details screen appears.
 Select Yes.
All mobile phone pairings and
phonebook data are now deleted,
except for the currently connected
mobile phone.

Device list
 In the device list, highlight the desired
mobile phone and push  the
controller  once.
The Options menu appears.
Before you can reconnect these mobile
phones with the system you must pair
them with the system again, see the
section “Pairing a mobile phone” on
page 153.
Showing details
This function shows you the Bluetooth®
device name and address of a paired mobile
phone.
 Call up the device list, see the section
“Calling up the device list” on page 161.
166


Options menu
Menu item Details

Details screen
 To close the details screen: Press the
controller .
PHONE
Settings
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Switching autoconnection function
on/off
 Call up the Settings menu, see the
section "Calling up the Settings menu"
on page 167.
Settings menu
The Settings menu includes the following
functions:
Switching autoconnection function on/
off, see page 167
Showing the device info, see page 168
Initialization functions, see page 168
Changing the passkey, see page 171


PHONE main menu
Settings menu item
 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
Calling up the Settings menu

 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section "Opening the PHONE main
menu" on page 152.




Status display
BT Autoconnection menu item
Settings menu
Connection status icon
Icon
= A mobile phone is connected
Icon
= No mobile phone is
connected
Settings menu
167
PHONE
Settings
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item BT Autoconnection.
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item My Device Info.
The autoconnection function will be
activated or deactivated, depending on
the previous status. The status display
 changes accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
The info screen appears.
Calling up the Initialization menu
 Call up the Settings menu, see the
section "Calling up the Settings menu"
on page 167.
Showing the device info
This function shows you the Bluetooth®
device name and address of the Driver
Information System.
 Call up the Settings menu, see the
section "Calling up the Settings menu"
on page 167.
 To close the info screen: Press the
controller .

Initialization functions
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Initialization.
Initialization includes the following
functions:


My Device Info menu item
Settings menu
168
Deleting the call history, see page 169
Deleting the phonebook, see page 169
Deleting all pairings, see page 170
Resetting Bluetooth® settings to factory
setting, see page 170

Settings menu
Initialization menu item
The Initialization menu appears.
PHONE
Settings
 Select Yes or No.
The complete call history will be deleted
or not, depending on the answer
selected.
Deleting the phonebook

Initialization menu
Deleting the call history
This function deletes the complete call
history (missed, received and dialed calls)
of the currently connected mobile phone
stored in the Driver Information System.
 Call up the Initialization menu, see the
section "Calling up the Initialization
menu" on page 168.


Delete Call History menu item
Initialization menu
 In the Initialization menu, select the
menu item Delete Call History.
This function deletes the complete
phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone stored in the Driver
Information System.
 Call up the Initialization menu, see the
section "Calling up the Initialization
menu" on page 168.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete the complete
call history.


Delete Phone Book menu item
Initialization menu
169
PHONE
Settings
 In the Initialization menu, select the
menu item Delete Phone Book.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete the complete
phonebook.
 Call up the Initialization menu, see the
section "Calling up the Initialization
menu" on page 168.
 Select Yes or No.


 Select Yes or No.
The complete phonebook will be
deleted or not, depending on the
answer selected.
Deleting all pairings
This function deletes all pairings as well as
the complete call history and phonebooks of
all mobile phones stored in the Driver
Information System.
170
Delete All Pairings menu item
Initialization menu
 In the Initialization menu, select the
menu item Delete All Pairings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete all pairings.
All pairings will be deleted or not,
depending on the answer selected.
Resetting Bluetooth® settings to factory
setting
This function resets the following
Bluetooth® settings to factory setting:
Bluetooth® autoconnect (please see
section "Switching autoconnection
function on/off" on page 167 for details)
Bluetooth® passkey (please see
section "Changing the passkey" on
page 171 for details)
PHONE
Settings
 Call up the Initialization menu, see the
section "Calling up the Initialization
menu" on page 168.
 Call up the Settings menu, see the
section "Calling up the Settings menu"
on page 167.
 Select Yes or No.


Reset Phone Settings menu item
Initialization menu
 In the Initialization menu, select the
menu item Reset Phone Settings.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to reset the Bluetooth®
settings to factory default.
The Bluetooth® settings will be set to
factory default or not, depending on the
answer selected.
Changing the passkey
During pairing a mobile phone with the
Driver Information System, you must enter
the passkey (please see section "Pairing a
mobile phone" on page 153 for details). The
default value of the passkey is 1234. You
can change the passkey, see the following
description.


Change Passkey menu item
Settings menu
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Change Passkey.
The input menu appears.
171
PHONE
Settings
 To delete all digits of the current
passkey displayed in the input field:
Select the menu item Delete All.
All digits are deleted.
 To make a new entry after deleting all
digits in the input field: Push  the
controller  to move to the speller and
enter digits, see the following
description.







Input field with current passkey
Speller
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the speller 
Confirm the passkey
Delete all digits in the input field 
Delete the last digit in the input field 
Currently highlighted digit
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the speller  and the area
with the menu items  and .
 To move from one area to another:
Push  or push  the controller .
At the beginning, the input field  shows
the current passkey and the menu item
Delete All is highlighted.
172
 To enter a digit: In the speller, highlight
a digit by turning   the controller 
and press the controller .
The digit is entered and appears in
input field.
 To delete the last digit of the current
passkey displayed in the input field:
In the speller, select the menu item .
The last digit is deleted.
 To confirm the passkey: After
entering 4 digits, the menu item OK will
be highlighted automatically. Press the
controller  to confirm the passkey.
PHONE
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
 To move from one area to another:
Push   the controller .
 To enter a number: In the speller ,
highlight a digit by turning   the
controller  and press the
controller .
Initiating an outgoing call
The following options for initiating an
outgoing call are available:
Entering a phone number, see
page 173
Using redial, see page 174
Call history list, see page 176
Using the phonebook, see the section
“Phonebook” on page 188
The digit is entered and appears in
input field .





Entering a phone number

 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.

 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Dial Number.
The input menu appears.

Input field with digits already entered
Speller
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the speller 
Initiate a call
Store number in the phonebook
Delete the last digit in the input field 
Delete all digits in the input field 
Currently highlighted digit
At the beginning, the input field  is empty.
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the speller  and the area
with the menu items ,  and .
 To delete the last digit in the input
field: In the speller, select the menu
item .
The last entered digit is deleted.
 To delete all digits in the input field:
From the speller, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
Delete All.
All digits are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
speller and enter a number as
described previously.
173
PHONE
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
 To store an entered number in the
phonebook: From the speller, push 
the controller  and select the menu
item SAVE.
 The name input menu appears,
continue as described in the section
“Creating a new entry”,
see page 190.
 To initiate a call to the phone number
entered: From the speller, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
CALL.
The mobile phone initiates the call; a
corresponding message is displayed.
The name of the call partner is only
displayed if the dialed number is stored in
the phonebook. Otherwise only the dialed
number is displayed.
 To cancel the call before the
other party answers: Press the
controller .
The call is cancelled.
If the other party answers, the call is
active and you conduct the call over the
hands-free unit. Please see the section
“Functions during a call” on page 181
for a description of the functions that
are possible during a call.
Using redial
You can use redial as a quick way of
initiating another call to the last number
dialed by the mobile phone.
 Press and hold the  button on the
steering wheel.

Name of the call partner
174
If the connected mobile phone supports
this feature, the call to the
corresponding phone number will be
initiated.
If the connected mobile phone does not
support this feature, nothing happens.
If the connected mobile phone
responds with an error, you will see the
message: Dial failed. Please check
the state of the connected phone
and try again..
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
 To cancel the call before the other
party answers: Press the controller 
or press and hold the  button on the
steering wheel.
In both cases, the call is cancelled.
If the other party answers, the call is active
and you conduct the call over the handsfree unit.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions available during a call.
You can also use the call history list for the
redial function, see the section “Call history
list” on page 176.
PHONE
Initiating a call/accepting or rejecting a call
Accepting/rejecting an incoming
call
The call screen is displayed when there is a
call incoming.
 Accepting a call: Select Accept or
briefly press the  button on the
steering wheel.
The call is active and you conduct it
over the hands-free unit.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions that are possible during a call.
 Rejecting a call: Select Reject or
press and hold the  button on the
steering wheel.
The call is rejected.
175
PHONE
Call history list
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
General Information
Calling up the call history list
 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.
The call history list contains the following:
Missed calls
Received calls
Dialed numbers

Each paired mobile phone has its own
independent call history list, but only the list
of the currently connected mobile phone
can be accessed. Each list contains a
maximum of 20 entries.

The call history list of a mobile phone will be
deleted automatically, as soon as the
pairing of the mobile phone is deleted.
 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Call History.
The call history lists of the system are
independent of those of the mobile phones.
The system can only log calls or dialed
numbers in the call history list if the mobile
phone is connected with it and if the phone
functions are being used via the system.
176



PHONE main menu
Call History menu item
The call history list appears. The entries
in the list are sorted in chronological
order, with the most recent at the top.
You will find an operating example for a list
in the section “Lists” on page 29 of the
chapter “Functional introduction”. There you
will also find the description of how to scroll
through a list.
Missed call (Icon / phone symbol with
question mark)
Incoming call (Icon
/ phone symbol
with left arrow)
Outgoing call (Icon
/ phone symbol
with right arrow)
Incoming and missed calls:
If the other party has transmitted the
phone number, the corresponding list
entry will show it.
If the phone number is exactly as
transmitted stored in the phonebook,
the name stored in the corresponding
phonebook entry will be shown instead
of the number.
If the other party has not transmitted the
phone number, the name Unknown will
be shown.
PHONE
Call history list
Outgoing calls:
The corresponding list entry shows either
the phone number or the name, depending
on the method the call was initiated.
Option 2
 Highlight the desired entry in the call
history list.
 Push  the controller  once.
Available options in the call history list
The Options menu appears.
The following options are available in the
call history list:
Initiating a call to a call history list entry,
see page 177
Saving a list entry to the phonebook,
seepage 178
Option 1
Deleting an individual list entry, see
page 178
 Select the desired entry in the call
history list.
Deleting all list entries, see page 179
Initiating a call to a call history list
entry
Initiating a call to a call history list entry
named Unknown is not possible.
 Call up the call history list, see the
section “Calling up the call history list”
on page 176.

Call history list
The mobile phone initiates the call.
 To cancel the call before the
other party answers: Press the
controller .
The call is cancelled.
If the other party answers, the call is
active and you conduct the call over the
hands-free unit.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions available during a call.


Menu item Call
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Call.
The mobile phone initiates the call.
 To cancel the call before the
other party answers: Press the
controller .
The call is cancelled.
177
PHONE
Call history list
If the other party answers, the call is active
and you conduct the call over the handsfree unit.
 Push  the controller  once.
The Options menu appears.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions available during a call.
Saving a list entry to the phonebook
Only list entries without a name can be
saved to the phonebook.
 Call up the call history list, see the
section “Calling up the call history list”
on page 176.



Menu item Save to Phone Book
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Save to Phone Book.
Call history list
 Highlight the desired entry in the call
history list.
 Push  the controller  once.
The Options menu appears.
The name input menu appears.
Continue as described in the section
“Name input menu”, see page 190.
Deleting an individual list entry

Call history list
 Highlight the desired entry in the call
history list.
178
 Call up the call history list, see the
section “Calling up the call history list”
on page 176.


Menu item Delete
Options menu
PHONE
Call history list
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete the entry.
Deleting all list entries
This function deletes all entries in the call
history list of the currently connected mobile
phone stored in the Driver Information
System.
 Call up the call history list, see the
section “Calling up the call history list”
on page 176.


Menu item Delete All
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really want to delete all entries in
the call history list currently open.
 Select Yes or No.
The entry will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.

Call history list
 In the call history list, push  the
controller  once.
The Options menu appears.
179
PHONE
Call history list
 Select Yes or No.
The entries will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
180
PHONE
Functions during a call
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Call display
The following illustration shows the display
during a call via the mobile phone.
Overview
The following functions are available during
a call:
Setting the call volume, see the section
“Setting the volume” on page 33
Mute the microphone, see page 182
Switching private mode on/off, see
page 182
Holding and reactivating a call, see
page 183
Sending DTMF tones, see page 183
Ending a call, see page 184
Special functions for two calls, see
page 185










Call status display:
Icon
= Call is active
Icon
= Call is on hold
Icon
= Private mode is switched on
Icon
= Microphone is muted
Name of the other party
Phone number of the other party
Call duration
Name of the mobile phone connected
with the system
Speller
End the call
Switch the microphone on/off
Switch private mode on/off
Hold or reactivate the call
If the other party transmits the phone
number and if it is exactly as transmitted
stored in the phonebook, the display 
shows the name stored in the
corresponding phonebook entry.
Additionally, the display  shows the
phone number.
If the transmitted phone number is not
stored in the phonebook, the display 
shows the phone number and the display 
is empty.
If no phone number is transmitted, the
display  shows Unknown and the display
 is empty.
User control area of the call display
The call display has three user-control
areas:
Area with the speller 
Area with the menu item 
Area with the menu items  - 
 To move from one area to another:
Push     the controller .
181
PHONE
Functions during a call
Mute the microphone
When the microphone is muted, the other
party cannot hear you although you can still
hear them.
Further, the call status display  will
change to
(microphone muted) or
(microphone not muted).
Switching private mode on/off
Private mode allows you to transfer the call
back and forth between the hands-free unit
and the mobile phone. This function is not
possible with all mobile phones. Some
mobile phones disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between the system and mobile
phone when private mode is switched on.
Private mode is automatically switched off
when you end the last active call.



Call status display
Menu item Mute Mic
Microphone status display
 In the call display, select the menu item
Mute Mic.
Depending on the previous status, the
microphone will be muted or not. The
microphone status display  will
change accordingly.
Display  = microphone muted
Display  = microphone not muted
When private mode is switched off you
conduct the call over the hands-free unit
(vehicle), when private mode is switched on
you conduct the call over the mobile phone.
Even when private mode is switched on,
the sound of the active audio or video
source is muted.



Call status display
Private Mode menu item
Private mode status display
 Option 1: Before or during the call,
select the menu item Private Mode in
the PHONE main menu.
 Option 2: During the call, press the 
button on the steering wheel.
Depending on the previous status,
private mode will be switched on or off.
The private mode status display  will
change accordingly.
Display  = private mode switched
on
Display  = private mode switched
off
Further, the call status display 
changes to .
182
PHONE
Functions during a call
Switching private mode on/off on the
steering wheel will also work if the monitor is
showing something other than PHONE
mode, for example the map display in
Navigation mode.
If you initiate or accept a call directly on the
mobile phone, private mode will be switched
on automatically. But this function is not
possible with all mobile phones.
Holding and reactivating a call
This function is only available if it is
supported and enabled by the phone
network operator and supported by the
mobile phone.
When the call is on hold, you will not hear
the other party and they will not hear you.


 To hold a call: In the call display, select
the menu item Hold Call.
The call is on hold and the menu item
Hold Call changes to Activate Call.
Further, the call status display 
changes to .
 To reactivate a call: In the call display,
select the menu item Activate Call.
The call is reactivated and the menu
item Activate Call changes to Hold
Call. Further, the call status display 
changes to .
Sending DTMF tones
DTMF tones can be sent during the call. You
can use them to control answering
machines or other devices, for example for
remote query functions.


Display of the digits or characters
already sent
Speller
 In the speller , highlight a digit or
character and press the controller .
The corresponding tone will be sent and
the digit or character appears in the
display .
Call status display
Hold Call or Activate Call menu item
183
PHONE
Functions during a call
Ending a call

END menu item
 Option 1: In the call display, select the
menu item END.
 Option 2: Press and hold the  button
on the steering wheel until the call is
ended.
Ending the call using the steering wheel
will also work if the display is showing
something other than PHONE mode,
for example the map display in Navigation
mode.
184
PHONE
Special functions for two calls
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Calling a second party
Overview
 To enter the phone number: Enter the
individual digits of the phone number as
described in the section “Entering a
phone number”, see page 173.
 To complete entry and initiate the
second call: Select the menu item
CALL.
The following functions are available
provided they are supported and enabled
by the phone network operator and
supported by the mobile phone:
The mobile phone initiates the call to
the second party; a corresponding
message is displayed.
Calling a second party, see page 185
Accepting/rejecting a call-waiting call,
see page 186

Swapping between two calls, see
page 186
 During a single call, select the menu
item Hold Call in the call display.
Ending the active call, see page 187

Call status display
Hold Call menu item
The call is on hold and the menu item
Hold Call changes to Activate Call.
Further, the call status display 
changes to .
 To cancel the call before the
other party answers: Press the
controller .
The first call is automatically
reactivated.
If the other party answers, the second
call is active.
You now have the following options:
Swapping between two calls, see
page 186
Ending the active call, see page 187
185
PHONE
Special functions for two calls
Accepting/rejecting a call-waiting
call
This function is only available if it is
supported by the phone and the phone
service provider and if it is enabled.
If someone rings you during a call, you
will see the call waiting display.
Accepting the call-waiting call and
holding the first call
 Option 1: Select Hold 1st Call.
Swapping between two calls
If you have one active call and one call on
hold, you can swap between the two calls.
 Option 2: Briefly press the  button
on the steering wheel.
In both cases, the call-waiting call is
accepted and active and the first call is
on hold.
Accepting the call-waiting call and
ending the first call
 Select End 1st Call.
The call-waiting call is accepted and
active and the first call is ended.
Rejecting the call-waiting call



Menu item Hold 1st Call
Menu item End 1st Call
Menu item Ignore
The following functions are available:
Accepting the call-waiting call and
holding the first call
Accepting the call-waiting call and
ending the first call
Rejecting the call-waiting call
186
 Select Ignore.
The first call remains active.







Icon
for the active call
Name of the active party
Phone number of the active party
Duration of the active call
Name of the party on hold
Swap Calls menu item
Icon
for the call on hold
PHONE
Special functions for two calls
If the other party transmits the phone
number and if it is exactly as transmitted
stored in the phonebook, the following is
valid:
The displays  and  are showing the
name stored in the corresponding
phonebook entry.
Additionally, the display  shows the
phone number of the active party.
Ending the active call
Ending the active call activates the
previously call on hold, which can then also
be ended.
If the transmitted phone numbers are not
stored in the phonebook, the displays 
and  are showing the phone numbers and
the display  is empty.
If no phone numbers are transmitted, the
displays  and  are showing Unknown
and the display  is empty.
 Option 1: Select the menu item Swap
Calls.
 Option 2: Briefly press the  button
on the steering wheel.

End Call menu item
 Option 1: In the call display, select the
menu item End Call.
 Option 2: Press and hold the  button
on the steering wheel until the call is
ended.
In both cases, the previously active call
is now on hold and the previously call
on hold is now active. The displays ,
 and  change accordingly.
187
PHONE
Phonebook
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
General information
For each paired mobile phone, the Driver
Information System is able to download the
phonebook data into its internal memory.
In order to download the phonebook data,
the mobile phone must be equipped with
Bluetooth® wireless technology and with
Bluetooth® phonebook access profile
(PBAP).
Each paired mobile phone has its own
phonebook stored the internal memory of
the system, but only the phonebook of the
currently connected mobile phone can be
accessed.
Calling up the phonebook
The following functions are now available:
 Open the PHONE main menu, see the
section “Opening the PHONE main
menu” on page 152.
Downloading the phonebook, see
page 189
Creating a new entry, see page 190
 In the PHONE main menu, select the
menu item Phone Book.
Editing an entry, see page 192
Searching for an entry, see page 194
Displaying details on an entry, see
page 199
Initiating a call to an entry, see
page 196
Deleting phonebook entries, see
page 198
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.
You will find an operating example for a list
in the section “Lists” on page 29 of the
chapter “Functional introduction”. There you
will also find the description of how to scroll
through a list.
Each phonebook holds a maximum of 1000
entries. Each entry can contain a name and
up to three phone numbers.
Deleting the pairing of a mobile phone
deletes also the corresponding phonebook
data stored in the internal memory of the
system, see sections “Deleting a pairing”
on page 164 and “Deleting all pairings” on
page 165.
188




PHONE main menu
Total number of phonebook entries
Phonebook
Menu item Phone Book
PHONE
Phonebook
Downloading the phonebook
Downloading the phonebook is only
possible if a mobile phone is connected with
the system. During downloading, each
downloaded entry will be compared with
entries already existing in the corresponding
phonebook stored in the internal memory of
the system. If the name of an entry being
downloaded is identical with the name of an
entry already existing, the entry already
existing will be overwritten.
 In the phonebook, select the menu item
Download Phone Book.
If the download preparation has not
been finished already, you will see an
appropriate message.
If the download preparation has been
finished already, the download starts
immediately. You will see an
appropriate message.
 Call up the phonebook, see section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
If the connected mobile phone does not
support the phonebook access profile
(PBAP), you will see an appropriate
message.


Phonebook
Menu item Download Phone Book
189
PHONE
Phonebook
 To cancel the download: Press the
controller .
Name input menu
After the download has been finished,
the message disappears automatically.
If the limit of 1000 entries is reached
during the download process, you will
see an appropriate message.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
Creating a new entry
You can also save entries in the call history
list as new phonebook entries, see the
section “Saving a list entry to the
phonebook” on page 178.
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.
You will find an operating example for a list
in the section “Lists” on page 29 of the
chapter “Functional introduction”. There you
will also find the description of how to scroll
through a list.
190


Phonebook
Menu item New Entry
 In the phonebook, select the menu item
New Entry.
The phonebook for each paired mobile
phone holds a maximum of 1000 entries.
The menu item New Entry cannot be
selected if the phonebook is full.
The name input menu appears. You
can now enter the name.





Input field with characters already
entered
Currently highlighted character
Speller
Complete entry
Delete all characters in the input field





Delete the last character in the input
field 
Enter space
Switch character set
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the speller 
At the beginning, the input field  is empty.
PHONE
Phonebook
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the speller  and the area
with the menu items  and .
 To move from one area to another:
Push   the controller .
Entering a name
You can enter a maximum of 50 characters
for a name.
 To enter a character: In the speller,
highlight a character by turning   the
controller  and press the
controller .
The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
 To switch character set: In the speller,
select one of the menu items .
The corresponding character set
appears in the speller.
 To delete the last character in the
input field: In the speller, select the
menu item .
 To delete all characters in the input
field: From the speller, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
Delete All.
Data field menu
The complete entry is deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
speller and enter characters as
described previously.
 To confirm an entry: From the speller,
push  the controller  and select the
menu item OK.
If the phonebook already contains an
entry with the name entered, you will
see an appropriate message.
 To close the display: Press the
controller .
 To correct an entry: Proceed as
described above.
If the phonebook do not yet contain an
entry with the name entered, you will
see the data field menu.






Name data field
Data already entered
Home phone number data field
Work phone number data field
Mobile phone number data field
Default phone number
If you initiate a call to a phonebook entry
which contains more than one phone
number, the system uses the default phone
number for this. Please see the section
“Setting the default phone number”
on page 193 to find out how to set the
default phone number.
The last character entered is deleted.
191
PHONE
Phonebook
Editing or entering the name
Scrolling through the phonebook
 In the data field menu, select the name
data field .
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
The name input menu appears.
 Continue as described in the section
“Name input menu”, see page 190.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.
Editing an entry
Calling up the phonebook
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.
Editing or entering phone numbers
You will find an operating example for a list
in the section “Lists” on page 29 of the
chapter “Functional introduction”. There you
will also find the description of how to scroll
through a list.
 In the data field menu, select one of the
phone number data fields  - .
The phone number input menu
appears.
 Continue as described in the section
“Name input menu”, see page 190.
The phone number input menu is similar to
the name input menu. In the phone number
input menu, only digits can be entered. You
can enter a maximum of 20 digits.
Closing the data field menu
 Briefly press the  button.
192

Phonebook
 Scroll through the phonebook by
turning   the controller .
A further scroll option is available. You will
find an operating example in the section
“Lists” on page 29 of the chapter “Functional
introduction”.

Phonebook
PHONE
Phonebook
Editing the desired entry
Setting the default phone number
 Highlight the desired entry in the
phonebook.
If you initiate a call to a phonebook entry
which contains more than one phone
number, the system uses the default phone
number for this.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 Highlight the phonebook entry you wish
to set as the default phone number.
 Push  the controller  once.

The Options menu appears.
Selection list
 Select the name or a phone number.
Either the name or the phone number
input menu appears.


Menu item Edit
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Edit.
A selection list appears.
 In both cases, continue as described in
the section “Name input menu”,
see page 190.
The phone number input menu is similar to
the name input menu. In the phone number
input menu, only digits can be entered. You
can enter a maximum of 20 digits.


Menu item Edit
Options menu
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Edit.
A selection list appears.
193
PHONE
Phonebook
Searching for an entry
Calling up the phonebook
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.



Selection list
Currently default number
Menu item Default Number
 Highlight the menu item Default
Number.
 Push  the controller  once.
A selection menu appears.

Icon  for currently active setting
 Select the desired phone number
category.
If the selected phone number category
contains a phone number, the selection
will be stored and the selection menu
disappears automatically.
If the selected phone number category
contains no phone number, you will see
the message Selected phone
number is not available. Please
enter the phone number first..
The message disappears after a short
time.
194

Phonebook
 In the phonebook, select the menu item
Search Entry.
The menu item Search Entry cannot be
selected if the phonebook does not contain
any entries.
A selection menu appears.
PHONE
Phonebook
The input menu has two user-control areas:
The area with the predictive speller  and
the area with the menu items  and .
 To move from one area to another:
Push   the controller .
Entering a name



Search by Name menu item
Search by Number menu item
Selection menu


 In the selection menu, select the menu
item Search by Name or Search by
Number.

Either the name or the number input
menu appears, depending on the menu
item selected.

Input menu
The following illustration and the
descriptions refer to the name input menu
and entering a name. The number input
menu and entering a number are similar.


Input field with characters already
entered
Currently highlighted character
Predictive speller
Confirm entry
Delete all characters in the input field





Delete the last character in the input
field 
Enter space
Switch character set
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller 
List of hits
 To enter a character: In the predictive
speller, highlight a character by
turning   the controller  and press
the controller .
Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller. The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered and the data for
the phonebook.
The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
The list of hits  is adapted
accordingly each time you enter
a character. It shows the entries
matching the entered characters.
At the beginning, the input field  is empty.
195
PHONE
Phonebook
 To switch character set: In the
predictive speller, select one of the
menu items .
Initiating a call to an entry
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
The corresponding character set
appears in the predictive speller.
 To delete the last character in the
input field: In the predictive speller,
select the menu item .
The last character entered is deleted.
 To delete all characters in the input
field: From the predictive speller,
push  the controller  and select the
menu item Delete All.

The following functions are now available:
Initiating a call to an entry, see section
“Option 1” on page 196 or section
“Option 2” on page 197.
Editing the desired entry, see page 193
Deleting entries, see page 198
Displaying details on the desired entry,
see page 199
All characters are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
Selection list

Phonebook
Option 1
 Select the desired entry.
Confirming the entry
If the entry contains only one number,
the system initiates the call to this
number.
 From the predictive speller, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
OK.
If the entry contains more than one
number, the system initiates the call to
the default number.
A selection list with one or more entries
containing the entered characters is
displayed.
Please see the section “Setting the default
phone number” on page 193 to find out how
to set the default phone number.
196
PHONE
Phonebook
 To cancel the call before the
other party answers: Press the
controller or press and hold
the  button on the steering
wheel.
If the other party answers, the call is active
and you conduct the call over the handsfree unit.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions available during a call.
The call is cancelled.
If the other party answers, the call is
active and you conduct the call over the
hands-free unit.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions available during a call.
If the entry contains more than one
number


Menu item Call
Options menu
Option 2
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Call.
 Highlight the desired entry.
If the entry contains only one number
 Push  the controller  once.
After selecting the menu item Call in the
Options menu, the system initiates the call
to this number immediately.
The Options menu appears.
 To cancel the call before the other
party answers: Press the controller 
or press and hold the  button on the
steering wheel.
The call is cancelled.
After selecting the menu item Call in the
Options menu, a selection list appears.

Highlighted default phone number
The default phone number is automatically
highlighted.
197
PHONE
Phonebook
Please see the section “Setting the default
phone number” on page 193 to find out how
to set the default phone number.
Deleting phonebook entries
Deleting entries
Calling up the phonebook
 To delete all entries: Highlight any
entry you like.
 To initiate the call to the default
phone number: Press the
controller .
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.
 To delete an individual entry:
Highlight the desired entry.
 To initiate the call to another
number: Highlight another number and
press the controller .
In both cases, the system initiates the
call to the corresponding phone
number.
 To cancel the call before the
other party answers: Press the
controller  or press and hold
the  button on the steering
wheel.
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.

If the other party answers, the call is
active and you conduct the call over the
hands-free unit.
198
The Options menu appears.
You will find an operating example for a list
in the section “Lists” on page 29 of the
chapter “Functional introduction”. There you
will also find the description of how to scroll
through a list.
The call is cancelled.
Please see the section “Functions during a
call” on page 181 for a description of the
functions available during a call.
 After highlighting, push  the
controller .



Phonebook
Options menu
Menu item Delete
Menu item Delete All
PHONE
Phonebook
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All or Delete.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
Depending on the menu item selected,
you will be prompted to confirm that you
wish to delete all entries or to delete the
highlighted entry.
The details screen appears.
 Select Yes or No.
Depending on the menu item and the
answer selected, all entries will be
deleted or retained, or the highlighted
entry will be deleted or retained.

Phonebook
Displaying details on the desired entry
Displaying details on an entry
 Highlight the desired entry.
Calling up the phonebook
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 Call up the phonebook, see the section
“Calling up the phonebook” on
page 188.




Name of the phonebook entry
Mobile phone number
Home phone number
Work phone number
 To close the details screen: Press the
controller .
The phonebook appears in the form of
a list.
You will find an operating example for a list
in the section “Lists” on page 29 of the
chapter “Functional introduction”. There you
will also find the description of how to scroll
through a list.


Options menu
Menu item Details
199
PHONE
Phonebook
200
Navigation
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Navigation main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Entering destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Functions after entering the destination. . . . . . . . . 230
Route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Functions during route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Functions independent of route guidance . . . . . . . 243
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book . 247
Editing Address Book entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
201
Navigation
General information
Safety instructions
Digital map
WARNING
WARNING
Due to changes in traffic conditions, the
navigation system may guide you to
impassable route.
During driving, always pay attention to the
the traffic condition.
Operations such as adding mark points and
searching POIs may distract you from the
traffic situation, thus increasing the accident
hazard.
Perform these operations only when the
vehicle is stationary.
202
If you use the navigation system, the
following factors may increase the accident
hazard:
Distraction from the traffic situation.
Failure to observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
Inappropriate audible driving
recommendations or route guidance
displays as a result of the real world not
matching the data on the digital map,
for example road works or modified
road routing.
Therefore, always comply with the following:
Only enter a navigation destination
when the vehicle is stationary.
Always observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
They always have priority over the
audible driving recommendations or
route guidance displays by the system.
The data for the digital map will become
obsolete, just like conventional road maps.
Optimum route guidance is only achieved
with up-to-date map software.
Information on new map software versions
is available from your Hyundai service
center.
GPS reception
The navigation system uses the Global
Positioning System (GPS). The correct
functioning of the navigation system is
dependent on the GPS reception.
In certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, distorted or even impossible,
for example in tunnels, multi-storey car
parks or due to snow on the GPS antenna.
The system will show you whether or not
the GPS reception is sufficient, see the
section “Calling up the map display and
switching to Navigation mode” on
page 204.
Navigation
General information
Route guidance after vehicle
transport
After vehicle transport (e.g. by ferry, car
train or by towing), the navigation system
no longer knows the correct vehicle
position. The system therefore needs to redetermine its position.
Positioning is performed automatically. The
actual length of time may vary from case to
case.
During positioning, route guidance is
subject to the following restrictions:
Audible driving recommendations,
route guidance displays and displayed
data do not match the actual location.
The system does not output audible
driving recommendations.
Once positioning is complete, route
guidance continues as usual with
appropriate audible driving
recommendations and route guidance
displays.
203
Navigation
Basic functions
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Calling up the map display and
switching to Navigation mode
 Press the  button.
The map display showing the current
vehicle position and further information
appears.


Voice control system is active
XM NavTraffic® information available
You can switch the map orientation, see the
section “North up view/Heading up view” on
page 265.
You can set the map scale, see the section
“Moving the map/setting the map scale” on
page 206.
Position/scroll mode within the map
display
The display  only appears when route
guidance is active. You can switch the
display  between displaying the data for
the next waypoint or for the main
destination, see the section “Switching the
remaining distance/journey time display”
on page 239.
If you call up the map display as previously
described, position mode is automatically
set.
In position mode, you always see the
current vehicle position.
The route  only appears if a route
guidance is active.
Map display shows day mode






Currently set map orientation
Current set map scale
Remaining distance/journey time to
destination
Current vehicle position
Route
Outside temperature
204
The display  only appears if XM
NavTraffic® information are available.
For further information about XM
NavTraffic® information please refer to
section “Traffic information” on page 245.
The icon
shown in the display  only
appears if the voice control system is
activate, see the section “Activating voice
control” on page 269.
If the audible driving recommendations are
deactivated, the display  will show the
icon
In scroll mode, you see a crosshairs on the
map and you can move (scroll) the map.
Switching mode
 To switch from position mode to
scroll mode: Push the controller  in
any direction (     ).
The crosshairs appear and you can
move the map, see the section “Moving
the map/setting the map scale” on
page 206.
Navigation
Basic functions
Options in position/scroll mode
Options in scroll mode only
Different options are available in the Options
menu depending on whether position mode
or scroll mode is set.
The following options are available in scroll
mode:
Saving the crosshairs position as a
destination in the address book
category Address List, see the section
“Option 2 (only for the category Address
List)” on page 248
Setting the center point of the
crosshairs as the destination, see
the section “Set/replace destination” on
page 230
Adding the center point of the
crosshairs as the waypoint, see
the section “Add waypoint” on page 230
Initiating a phone call to a POI, see the
section “Initiating a phone call to a POI”
on page 244
Opening the Options menu
 In the map display, press the
controller .
The Options menu appears. The
options available in the respective
mode are described in the following
sections.
Map display shows night mode




Information on the crosshairs position
Crosshairs
Current vehicle position
Distance and direction from the vehicle
position to the crosshairs position in a
straight line
 To switch from scroll mode to
position mode: Press the  button.
The crosshairs disappear and the map
is automatically set to the current
vehicle position.
If you have moved the map, you can quickly
move the map to the vehicle position using
this function.
If you press the  button while route
guidance is active, you will also hear a
current audible driving recommendation.
 To close the Options menu: Briefly
press the  button.
Options in position and scroll mode
The following options are available in
position and scroll modes:
Traffic information, see page 245
“North up view/Heading up view”, see
page 265
Entering a POI destination via a vicinity
search, see page 224
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example. This function is only available if
the center point of the crosshairs is
indicating a POI.
205
Navigation
Basic functions
Options in position mode only
The following options are available in
position mode:
Suspending route guidance, see
page 237
Information on the current vehicle
position
 Press the  button.
You will see an information display on
the current vehicle position at the top of
the display, if the digital map contains
corresponding data.
The display disappears automatically
after a short time.
This function is only available during route
guidance.
Resuming route guidance, see
page 237
If you move the map while the vehicle is
stationary, then the rate at which the map
moves will increase the longer you press
and hold the controller .
 To activate scroll mode: Push the
controller  in any direction
(     ).
If the map was previously in position
mode, it will switch to scroll mode and
you will see a crosshairs.
This function is only available if route
guidance was previously interrupted.
Reroute/detour, see page 238
Activating/deactivating audible driving
recommendations, see page 207
Map display shows night mode
Map mode, see page 265

Switching the remaining distance/
journey time display, see page 239
Information display
Moving the map/setting the map
scale
It is no longer possible to gradually move the
map as soon as the vehicle exceeds a
certain speed. It becomes possible to
gradually move the map again as soon as
the vehicle falls below a certain speed.
Map display shows night mode





206
Information on the crosshairs position
Crosshairs
Current vehicle position
Distance and direction from the vehicle
position to the crosshairs position in a
straight line
Currently set map scale
Navigation
Basic functions
 To move the map: Push and hold the
controller  in any direction
(     ).
The map moves accordingly.
 To set the map scale: Turn   the
controller  until the desired scale is
reached.
 To quickly set the map to the vehicle
position: Press the  button.
The crosshairs disappear. The map is
automatically set to the current vehicle
position and is in position mode.
Guidance volume settings
Setting the volume of the audible driving
recommendations
The volume can also be set during an
audible driving recommendation, see the
section “Functional introduction”, section
“Setting the volume” on page 33.
Opening the Settings menu
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
Setting the volume
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Guidance Volume.
A selection menu appears.
 In the selection menu, select the menu
item Adjust Volume.
The volume scale appears.
 Turn   the controller  until the
desired setting is reached.
The system saves this setting
automatically.
 To close the menu: Press the 
button.
Activating/deactivating audible driving
recommendations
If audible driving recommendations are
deactivated, you will see the
icon on the
left-hand side of the map display.
The icon will also be visible in the bottom
status line, if the status line is displayed.
Option 1
 To call up the map display in
position mode: Press the  button.
The map display appears.
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
 To activate/deactivate: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Voice
Guidance Off or Voice Guidance
On.
The text of the menu item and the icon
to the left of the menu item change
accordingly, both always show the
current status.
Icon
on
= Voice guidance switched
Icon
off
= Voice guidance switched
 To close the Options menu: Press
the  button.
207
Navigation
Basic functions
Option 2
 To open the Settings menu: Press
the  button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
 To activate/deactivate: In the Settings
menu, select the menu item Mute
Guidance.
Depending on the previous status, the
audible driving recommendations will
be activated or deactivated. The status
display to the left of the menu item
changes accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
208
Calling up a current audible driving
recommendation
If you did not understand an audible driving
recommendation, you can call up a current
driving recommendation at any time.
 Press the  button.
You will hear a current audible driving
recommendation. The display will
simultaneously switch to the map
display, if it was previously showing
a different display.
Navigation
Navigation main menu
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Opening the Navigation main menu
 Press the  button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
You can access the following menu items in
the Navigation main menu:
Destination, see the section “Entering
destinations” on page 210
Show Route, see the section “Show
route” on page 237
The menu item Show Route is only
available when route guidance is active.
Change Route, see the section
“Change route” on page 239
The menu item Change Route is only
available if a destination has been entered.



Navigation main menu
Highlighted menu item
Submenu items of the highlighted menu
item
Edit Addr. Book see the section
“Editing Address Book entries” on
page 254
Settings, see the section “Settings” on
page 258
209
Navigation
Entering destinations
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
When entering a destination, you can only
enter the data stored in the digital map.
Available options
The following options are available for
entering a destination:
Entering a destination via the Address
Book, see page 227
Entering an emergency destination, see
page 228
Entering a destination via the map, see
page 229
Entering a destination via the
address

Entering a destination via the address,
see page 210
Opening the address input menu
Entering a destination via the Previous
Destinations, see page 215
Entering a destination via Intersection
input, see page 215
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
Entering a POI destination via POI
name, see page 216
Entering a POI destination via POI
category, see page 220
Entering a POI destination via POI
phone number, see page 223
Entering a POI destination via a vicinity
search, see page 224
210
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.






A selection list appears.
 In the selection list, select the item
Address.
Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
Hit list (empty if no address has been
entered)
Input field
Predictive speller
Confirm entry
Delete all characters in the input field


The address input menu appears.

Delete the last character in the input
field 
Menu item for entering the state/
province
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
Navigation
Entering destinations
Now you have the following options:
Entering/deleting characters
Entering a state/province, see section
“Entering a state/province” on page 211
Entering a street, see section “Entering
a street” on page 212.
 To enter a character: In the predictive
speller , highlight a character and
press the controller .
The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
Before entering a street, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered
before.
After entering a street, entering a city,
see section “Entering a city” on
page 213.
After entering a street or city, entering a
house number, see section “Entering a
house number” on page 214.
Entering a state/province
 Open the address input menu, see
section “Opening the address input
menu” on page 210.
 In the address input menu, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
State/Prov..







Hit list
Currently highlighted character
Input field
Number of hits in the hit list 
Predictive speller
Confirm entry
Delete all characters in the input field



Delete the last character in the input
field 
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller 
Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller . The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered.
Before any character is entered, the hit list
 shows all states/provinces. Each time
you enter a character, the hit list is
narrowed down in accordance with the
characters already entered. As soon as the
entry is unambiguous, the hit list contains
just one entry. Once you reach this stage
you cannot enter any further characters,
you can only complete the entry.
 To delete the last character in the
input field : Select the menu item
.
The last character entered is deleted.
Now you can enter the state/province.
211
Navigation
Entering destinations
 To delete all characters in the input
field : Push  the controller  and
select the menu item Delete All.
 Select an entry in the hit  list.
The entry of the state/province is
complete. You can enter the desired
street.
All characters are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
Completing entry
 Option 1: Keep entering characters
until the menu item OK is automatically
highlighted, then press the
controller .
Entering a street
Before entering a street, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered,
see section “Entering a state/province” on
page 211.
 Open the address input menu, see
section “Opening the address input
menu” on page 210.
The entry of the state/province is
complete. You can enter the desired
street, see below.


Number of hits in the hit list 
Predictive speller
Confirm entry
Delete all characters in the input field



Delete the last character in the input
field 
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller 
Entering/deleting characters
 To enter a character: In the predictive
speller , highlight a character and
press the controller .
Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller . The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered and the data for
the digital map.
 Option 3: After entering at least one
character, push  the controller  and
select the menu item OK manually.




212

The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
 Option 2: Push  the controller .
After choosing option 2 or 3, the hit list
is now active.

Input progress display
Hit list
Input field
Currently highlighted character
Before any character is entered, the hit list
 is empty. Each time you enter a
character, the hit list is narrowed down in
accordance with the characters already
entered.
Navigation
Entering destinations
As soon as the entry is unambiguous, the
hit list contains just one entry. Once you
reach this stage you cannot enter any
further characters, you can only complete
entry.
 To delete the last character in the
input field : Select the menu item
.
The last character entered is deleted.
 To delete all characters in the input
field : Push  the controller  and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
Completing entry
 Option 1: Keep entering characters
until the menu item OK is automatically
highlighted, then press the
controller .
The entry of the street is complete.
If there is only one city matching to the
street, you can enter a house number,
see section “Entering a house number”
on page 214.
Entering a city
Before entering a city, you must enter a
street, see section “Entering a street” on
page 212.
If there are several towns/cities
matching to the street, you can enter a
city, see section “Entering a city” on
page 213.
 Option 2: Push  the controller .
 Option 3: After entering at least one
character, push  the controller  and
select the menu item OK.
After choosing option 2 or 3, the hit list
is now active.

 Select an entry in the hit list.
In both cases, entry of the street is
complete.
If there is only one city matching to the
street, you can enter a house number,
see section “Entering a house number”
on page 214.
If there are several towns/cities
matching to the street, you can enter a
city, see section “Entering a city” on
page 213.



Input progress display
Number of hits in the hit list 
Hit list of towns/cities matching to the
already entered street
 To enter a city: Proceed as previously
when entering a street, see section
“Entering a street” on page 212.
If house numbers for the entered street
are available, you can enter a house
number, see section “Entering a house
number” on page 214.
213
Navigation
Entering destinations
If no house numbers are available for the
entered street, entry of the destination is
complete and you see the corresponding
destination on the map. Further options are
now available, see the section “Options
after entering the destination” on page 230.
Selecting a house number
Entering a house number

Input progress display
List of house number ranges

 Select the desired house number
range.

Entering a house number
Before entering a house number, you must
enter a city, see section “Entering a city” on
page 213.
If there are two or more house number
ranges available for the entered street, you
can select a house number range, see
section “Selecting a house number” on
page 214.
If there is only one house number range
available for the entered street, you can
enter the house number, see section
“Entering a house number” on page 214.

Now you can enter a house number.








214
Input progress display
Currently highlighted character
Input field
Predictive speller
Confirm entry
Delete all characters in the input field
Delete the last character in the input
field 
Switch character set
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller 
Navigation
Entering destinations
 To enter a character: In the predictive
speller , highlight a character and
press the controller .
The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
 To delete the last character in the
input field : Select the menu item
.
The last character entered is deleted.
 To delete all characters in the input
field : Push  the controller  and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
 To complete the entry: Push  the
controller  and select the menu item
OK.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
Entering a destination via the
Previous Destinations
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
 In the selection list, select the menu
item Previous Destinations.
The menu item Previous Destinations
can only be selected if at least one route
guidance to a destination has been started
previously.
After selecting the menu item, you will
see a list of the recent destinations for
which a route guidance session has
been started previously. This list
contains automatically a maximum of
40 previous destinations and, at the top
of the list, the last previous start point.
 To select a destination: Select a list
entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
Entering a destination via
Intersection input
Before entering a destination via
Intersection input, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered,
see section “Entering a state/province” on
page 211.
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
215
Navigation
Entering destinations
 In selection list, select the menu item
Intersection.
Now you can enter the first street.
 To enter the first street: Proceed as
previously when entering a street, see
section “Entering a street” on page 212.
After entering the first street, you can
enter the second street.
 To enter the second street: Proceed
as previously when entering a street,
see section “Entering a street” on
page 212.
If the intersection is unambiguous, entry
of the destination is complete and you
see the corresponding destination on
the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
If the intersection is ambiguous, you
must enter the city.
 To enter the city: Proceed as
previously described in section
“Entering a city” on page 213.
After entering the city, entry of the
destination is complete and you see the
corresponding destination on the map.
Further options are now available, see
the section “Options after entering the
destination” on page 230.
Entering a POI destination via POI
name
Opening the POI name input menu
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
 In the selection list, select the menu
item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
216

POI main menu
 In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Name.
The POI name input menu appears.
Navigation
Entering destinations
Entering a state/province
 In the POI name input menu, Push 
the controller , select the menu item
State/Prov. and proceed as previously
described in the section “Entering a
state/province” on page 211.
After entering the state/province, the
POI name input menu appears again.
Now you can enter a POI name.






Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
Hit list (empty if no name has been
entered)
Input field
Predictive speller
Menu item for setting a category/city
filter
Delete all characters in the input field
Entering a POI name


Delete the last character in the input
field 
Menu item for entering the state/
province
Enlarged display of the highlighted
character in the predictive speller 
Before entering a POI name, make sure that
the correct state/province has been entered,
see section below.

Menu item for setting a category/city
filter
Delete all characters in the input field



Delete the last character in the input
field 
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller 
 To enter a character: In the predictive
speller , highlight a character and
press the controller .
The character is entered and appears in
the input field .
Not all of the characters displayed can be
highlighted in the predictive speller . The
characters that can be highlighted depend
on those already entered and the data for
the digital map.









Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
Hit list (empty if no name has been
entered)
Input field
Currently highlighted character
Number of hits in the hit list 
Predictive speller
Before any character is entered, the hit list
 is empty. Each time you enter a
character, the hit list is narrowed down in
accordance with the characters already
entered.
217
Navigation
Entering destinations
As soon as the entry is unambiguous, the
hit list contains just one entry. Once you
reach this stage you cannot enter any
further characters, you can only complete
entry.
Category/city filter
After entering at least one character of the
POI name, you can set a category/city filter
to narrow down the available POIs.
 In the name input menu, push  the
controller  and select the menu item
Filter.
 To delete the last character in the
input field : Select the menu item
.
You will see the filter main menu.
The last character entered is deleted.
 To delete all characters in the input
field : Push  the controller  and
select the menu item Delete All.
All characters are deleted.
 To make a new entry: Push  the
controller  to move back to the
predictive speller and enter characters
as described previously.
 To complete the entry: Push  the
controller .
You will see the POI list.


POI list
POI with sub entries (number of sub
entries)
 Select an entry in the POI list.
If you have selected a POI with sub
entries, you can select a sub entry.
After selecting an entry without sub
entries or after selecting a sub entry,
entry of the POI destination is complete
and you see the corresponding
destination on the map. Further options
are now available, see the section
“Options after entering the destination”
on page 230.




Input progress display
Hit list
Currently filter status
Number of hits in the hit list 
 To set the category or the city filter:
Select the menu item Category or
Town/City.
The menu for entering a category or a
city appears.
218
Navigation
Entering destinations
 Press the controller .
The filter main menu appears again.
You can open the POI list now, see
below.
 Option 2 to complete the entry:
Push  the controller .
Ilustration shows the menu for entering a
category as an example


Hit list
Menu item OK
 To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section “Entering a POI
name” on page 217.
 Option 1 to complete the entry: Keep
entering characters until the hit  list
contains just one entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
 Option 3: After entering at least one
character, push  the controller  and
select the menu item OK.
After choosing option 2 or 3, the hit list
 is active now.
 Select an entry in the hit list .
The filter main menu appears again.
You can open the POI list.
 To open the POI list: In the filter main
menu, push  the controller .
The POI list appears.


POI list
POI with sub entries (number of sub
entries)
 Select an entry in the POI list.
If you have selected a POI with sub
entries, you can select a sub entry.
After selecting an entry without sub
entries or after selecting a sub entry,
entry of the POI destination is complete
and you see the corresponding
destination on the map. Further options
are now available, see the section
“Options after entering the destination”
on page 230.
219
Navigation
Entering destinations
Entering a POI destination via POI
category
 In the POI main menu, select the menu
item Category.
The POI category main menu appears.
Opening the POI category main menu
POIs along the route or near to a
destination already entered or near to
the current position
 Open the POI category main menu, see
section “Opening the POI category
main menu” on page 220.
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
 In the POI category main menu, select
the menu item Along Route or Near
Destination or Near Here.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
The category input menu appears. You
can enter a category name.
A selection list appears.
 In the selection list, select the menu
item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.

POI category main menu
The following options are available:

POI main menu
220
Selecting a category with POIs near to
a particular city center, see section
“POIs near to a particular city center” on
page 221.
Selecting a category with POIs along
the route or near to a destination
already entered or near to the current
position, see the following description.


Hit list
Menu item OK
Navigation
Entering destinations
 To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section “Entering a POI
name” on page 217.
The sorting status is also identified by
the icon to the left of the menu item .
 Option 1 to complete the entry: Keep
entering characters until the hit  list
contains just one entry.
The POI list appears, see illustration
below.
 Option 2 to complete the entry:
Push  the controller .
 Option 3 to complete the entry: After
entering at least one character, push 
the controller  and select the menu
item OK.
After choosing option 2 or 3, the hit list
 is active now.
 Select an entry in the hit list .
The POI list appears.
Icon
= List is sorted alphabetical
Icon
= List is sorted by distance
The menu item  cannot be selected if the
list contains fewer than three entries.
 To select a POI: Select a list entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
 Press the controller .






Sorting menu item
Input progress display
Number of hits in the POI list 
Distance to the POI
Direction to the POI
POI list
 To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item .
The POI list is resorted.
The labelling of the menu item 
always shows the current sorting
status. It will change with every
selection.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
POIs near to a particular city center
 Open the POI category main menu, see
section “Opening the POI category
main menu” on page 220.
 In the POI category main menu, select
the menu item Near City Center.
The city input menu appears. You can
enter a city.
Possible labelings:
Sort Alphabetically
Sort by Distance
221
Navigation
Entering destinations
Entering a city
Entering a POI category
 To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section “Entering a POI
name” on page 217.
 Option 1 to complete entering a city:
Keep entering characters until the hit 
list contains just one entry.



Hit list
Menu item State/Prov.
Menu item OK
Before entering a city, make sure that the
correct state/province has been entered.
Entering a state/province
 Select the menu item State/Prov. and
proceed as previously described, see
section “Entering a state/province” on
page 211.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
 Press the controller .
Now you can enter a POI category, see
the corresponding section below.
 Option 2 to complete entering a city:
Push  the controller .
 Option 3 to complete entering a city:
After entering at least one character,
push  the controller  and select the
menu item OK.
After choosing option 2 or 3, the hit list
 is active now.
 Select an entry in the hit list .
Now you can enter a POI category.
222


Hit list
Menu item OK
 To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
POI name, see section “Entering a POI
name” on page 217.
 Option 1 to complete the entry: Keep
entering characters until the hit  list
contains just one entry.
The menu item OK is automatically
highlighted.
 Press the controller .
The POI list appears, see illustration
below.
Navigation
Entering destinations
 Option 2 to complete the entry:
Push  the controller .
 Option 3 to complete the entry: After
entering at least one character, push 
the controller  and select the menu
item OK.
After choosing option 2 or 3, the hit list
 is active now.
 Select an entry in the hit list .
The POI list appears.
 To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item .
The POI list is resorted.
The labelling of the menu item 
always shows the current sorting
status. It will change with every
selection.
Entering a POI destination via POI
phone number
 Open the POI category main menu, see
section “Opening the POI category
main menu” on page 220.
 In the POI category main menu, select
the menu item Phone Number.
Possible labelings:
The phone number input menu
appears.
Sort Alphabetically
Sort by Distance
The sorting status is also identified by
the icon to the left of the menu item .
Icon
= List is sorted alphabetical
Icon
= List is sorted by distance
The menu item  cannot be selected if the
list contains fewer than three entries.
 To select a POI: Select a list entry.





Sorting menu item
Input progress display
Number of hits in the POI list 
Distance to the POI
POI list
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.




Input field
Predictive speller
Enlarged display of the currently
highlighted character in the predictive
speller
Confirm entry
223
Navigation
Entering destinations

Delete all characters in the input field





Delete the last character in the input
field 
Menu item for entering the state/
province
Currently highlighted character
Input progress display (in the example
currently entered state/province)
Before entering a phone number, make sure
that the correct state/province has been
entered.
 To complete the entry: Push  the
controller , select the menu item OK.
If the phone number is unambiguous,
entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
If the phone number is ambiguous, a
POI list appears.
Entering a state/province
 To enter and delete characters:
Proceed as previously when entering a
house number, see section “Entering a
house number” on page 214.
224
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
If the map is in position mode, you can
search for POIs in the vicinity of the vehicle;
if the map is in scroll mode, you can search
for POIs in the vicinity of the crosshairs.
For information on position and scroll
mode, refer to the section “Position/scroll
mode within the map display” on page 204.
Entry of a POI destination via a vicinity
search is divided into the following steps:
 Push  the controller , select the
menu item State/Prov. and proceed as
previously described, see section
“Entering a state/province” on
page 211.
Entering a phone number
Entering a POI destination via a
vicinity search
1. Activating/deactivating POI categories
2. Selecting a POI in the POI list or
Selecting a POI in the map
Opening the Options menu
 To select a POI: Select a list entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
 In the map screen, press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
Navigation
Entering destinations
Opening the POI menu
Activating/deactivating POI categories
Menu item “Others”
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item POI Icon.
You can activate a maximum of five
categories.
Selecting the menu item Others leads to a
selection of further categories or
subcategories.
The POI menu appears; you can now
activate or deactivate POI categories or
subcategories. Activating one or more
categories or subcategories restricts
the POI search to these categories or
subcategories.
 To close the menus: Press the 
button repeatedly until all of the menus
are closed.
 In the POI menu , select categories
from the five topmost menu items.
The corresponding categories will be
activated or deactivated, depending on
the previous status. The status display
to the left of the menu item changes
accordingly.
Display  = category activated
Display  = category deactivated
The icon for the activated category
appears simultaneously in the display
.
 To deactivate all categories or
subcategories: In the POI menu,
select the menu item Unmark All.
All categories or subcategories are
deactivated.
Map display shows night mode


POI menu
Icons of POI categories already
activated
 In the POI menu , select the menu
item Others.
A category list appears.
 Select a category.
A subcategory list appears.
 Select a subcategory.
 To close the subcategory and
category lists: Press the  button
repeatedly until the POI menu appears
again.
After selecting at least one category or
subcategory, you can select a POI in
the map or in a list, see “Selecting a POI
in the map” on page 226 or “Selecting a
POI in the POI list” on page 226.
After activating at least one category, you
can select a POI in the map or in a list, see
“Selecting a POI in the map” on page 226
or “Selecting a POI in the POI list” on
page 226.
225
Navigation
Entering destinations
Selecting a POI in the map
Selecting a POI in the POI list
 To close the menus: Press the 
button repeatedly until all of the menus
are closed.
 To call up the POI list: In the POI
menu, select the menu item Show POI
List.
A list with POIs corresponding to the
previously selected categories or
subcategories appears.
The map display appears. The
available POIs in accordance with the
activated categories/subcategories are
shown as icons.
The illustration below shows an
example display with route filtering
deactivated.
 To select a POI: Keep moving the map
until the desired POI is in the
crosshairs. To do so, proceed as
described in the section “Moving the
map/setting the map scale” on
page 206.

 To confirm selection: Press the
controller .
You can select a POI in the map
again.
If the selection is valid, entry of the
destination is complete. Further options
are now available, see the section
“Options after entering the destination”
on page 230.
226
Direction in which you must leave the
route to get to the POI
When route filtering is activated, the list will
show only POIs along the route.
When route filtering is deactivated, the list
will show additionally POIs not along the
route.
If the selection is invalid, you will see an
appropriate message.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
The illustration below shows an
example display with route filtering
activated.




Activate/deactivate route filtering
Distance of the POI from the vehicle
position
Direction to the POI
POI list
You can only activate route filtering when
route guidance is active.
Navigation
Entering destinations
 To activate/deactivate route filtering:
In the POI list, select the menu item
Along Route.
Route filtering will be activated or
deactivated, depending on the previous
status. The status display to the left of
the menu item changes accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
 Select the menu item Address Book.
The Address Book appears.
 To select a POI: Select a POI in the list.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.

Address book
Entering a destination via the
Address Book
Selecting the destination in the Address
Book
Calling up the Address Book
Option 1
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
 Select one of the following destination
Address Book categories:
Home
Work
Favorite Point 1
Favorite Point 2
Favorite Point 3
Favorite Point 4
If a category does not yet contain a
destination, then that respective category
cannot be selected. Refer to the section
“Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress
Book” on page 247 to find out how to store
destinations.
After you select a category, entry of the
destination is complete and you see the
corresponding destination on the map.
Further options are now available, see
the section “Options after entering the
destination” on page 230.
Option 2
 Select the Address Book category
Address List.
After you select the category, you will
see a list of the destinations you have
stored. This list contains a maximum of
200 entries.
227
Navigation
Entering destinations
Refer to the section “Saving/deleting
destinations in the Adress Book”
on page 247 to find out how to store
destinations.
 To sort the list by date of storage or
alphabetical: Select the menu item
Sort by Date or Sort Alphabetically.
The list is resorted and the text of the
menu item and the icon to the left of the
menu item change accordingly, both
always show the current status.
Icon
= List is sorted by date of
storage
Icon
Entering an emergency destination
Emergency destinations are Hospitals or
Police stations, for example.
 Select the desired category, e.g.
POLICE STATION.
A POI list appears.
 Open the Navigation main menu, see
section “Opening the Navigation main
menu” on page 209.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
 Select the menu item Emergency.
The Emergency category list appears.

= List is sorted alphabetical

The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.



 To select a destination: Select a list
entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
228

Sorting menu item
Input progress display
Number of hits in the POI list 
Direction to the POI
Distance to the POI
POI list
 To sort the POI list: Select the menu
item .
The POI list is resorted.

Emergency category list
The labelling of the menu item 
always shows the current sorting
status. It will change with every
selection.
Navigation
Entering destinations
Possible labelings:
Sort Alphabetically
Sort by Distance
The sorting status is also identified by
the icon to the left of the menu item .
Icon
= List is sorted alphabetical
Icon
= List is sorted by distance
The menu item  cannot be selected if the
list contains fewer than three entries.
 To select a POI: Select a list entry.
Entry of the destination is complete and
you see the corresponding destination
on the map. Further options are now
available, see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on page 230.
Entering a destination via the map
Calling up the map
Option 1
 Briefly press the  button.
The map appears.
Option 2
 Press the  button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Destination.
A selection list appears.
 In the selection list, select the item
Map.
The map appears.
Selecting the destination in the map
 Keep moving the map until the desired
destination is in the crosshairs. To do
so, proceed as described in the section
“Moving the map/setting the map scale”
on page 206.
 To confirm selection: Press the
controller .
If the selection is not a valid destination,
you will see an appropriate message.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
If the selection is a valid destination and
it is either on a highway, on a motor
way, on a bridge or in a tunnel, you will
be prompted to confirm that you wish to
accept the destination.
 To confirm the destination: Select
Yes.
Entry of the destination is complete.
Further options are now available,
see the section “Options after
entering the destination” on
page 230.
 To reject the destination: Select No.
You can select another destination
in the map.
If the selection is a valid destination and
it is not on a highway, on a main road,
on a bridge or in a tunnel, entry of the
destination is complete.
Further options are now available, see
the section “Options after entering the
destination” on page 230.
You can select another destination in
the map.
229
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Options after entering the
destination
After you have entered the destination, you
will see the destination on the map and, on
the right-hand side of the display, the
Options menu with information about the
destination.
The functions available in the Options
menu  will vary depending on the
following factors:
Whether the destination was entered
via the map
Whether route guidance to a
destination is already active
The illustration above shows the Options
menu when route guidance is already active
and the new destination was not entered via
the map.
Functions possibly available in the Options
menu:
Map display shows day mode




Information about the destination (not
shown if the destination has been
entered via the map)
Address of the destination
Options menu
Destination
230
Set/replace destination, see page 230
Add waypoint (only available if route
guidance is already active), see
page 230
Add to Address Book, see page 231
Dial number, see page 231
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
Adjust position (not available if the
destination was entered via the map),
see page 231
Set/replace destination
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Set Destination or Replace
Destination.
The menu item Set Destination is only
available if route guidance is not yet active.
The menu item Replace Destination is
only available if a route to a destination has
already been calculated.
Selecting either of these two menu
items confirms the destination. If the
menu item Replace Destination is
selected, the previous destination and
all waypoints are first discarded.
After the destination is confirmed, the
system starts to calculate the route, see
the section “Route calculation” on
page 232.
Add waypoint
This function adds the entered destination
as a waypoint to an existing route. You can
add a maximum of two waypoints to the
route.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Add Waypoint.
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
The menu item Add Waypoint is not
available if route guidance is not yet active
or if two waypoints already exist.
The system adds the previously
entered destination as a waypoint.
A new waypoint is always added as the
second last destination; the last destination
is always the main destination. An existing
waypoint is moved accordingly when a new
waypoint is added.
If the vehicle is moving, the system
calculates a new route, see the section
“Route calculation” on page 232.
If the vehicle is not moving, the
destination list appears. You can now
change the position of the waypoint in
the destination list.
 To change the position of the
waypoint: Turn   the controller 
until the desired position is reached.
 To confirm the position: Press the
controller .
The system calculates a new route,
see the section “Route calculation”
on page 232.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Add to Address Book.
The menu item Add to Address Book
cannot be selected if there are already
200 destinations saved in the category
Address List of the address book.
The crosshairs center will be saved as
destination in the category Address
List of the address book. When saving,
the system sets the standard icon
(red colored pin) in the map at the
destination position; this icon remains
visible in the map even after the save
operation.
The system automatically uses the
address as the destination name when
saving. You can edit the name and
assign a different icon later, see the
section “Editing an entry” on page 254.
Dial number
This function initiates a call to a POI. It is
only available if the following conditions are
met:
The entered destination is a POI.
The digital map contains the phone
number of the POI.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Dial Number.
The system initiates the call.
Adjust position
This function adjusts the destination
position. It is not available if the destination
was entered via the map.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Adjust Position.
The Options menu is closed.
Add to Address Book
231
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
 Keep moving the map until the
destination position is in the crosshairs
center. To do so, proceed as described
in the section “Moving the map/setting
the map scale” on page 206.
If the destination is too close to the current
vehicle position, the message Destination
appears.

 To confirm the position: Press the
controller .
After the route has been calculated, you will
see the entire route including start/
destination and any waypoints in the map.
To the right of the map you will see route
information and the Options menu.
The following functions are available in the
Options menu :
If the position is invalid, you will see an
appropriate message.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
ist too close to the current location.
Please use the map for guidance.
Options menu
You can adapt the destination
position again.
Route Calculation in Progress Please
wait. appears.
232


Options menu
Waypoints (Yellow icons
Destination (Icon )
Route
Current vehicle position
Start route guidance, see page 232
Other routes, see page 233
Simulate route, see page 234
Change route, see page 234
Route guidance is automatically started
after a certain time without operation.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Start Route Guidance.
Route calculation
During route calculation, the message

Start route guidance
If the position is valid, the Options menu
reappears and all previously described
options are once more available.
After the destination entry has been
confirmed, route calculation starts.

Map display shows night mode


Remaining distance/journey time to
destination
Route information
The system starts route guidance, see
the section “Route guidance” on
page 235.
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
Other routes
Information about a route
In addition to already calculated routes, the
system can calculate up to four other
routes. This function is only available if the
following conditions are met:
 Highlight a route in the route menu .
You will see information about the
highlighted route in the information
display .
The route does not contain any
waypoints.
Route comparison
Route guidance has not yet been
started.
 In the Route menu, select the menu
item Route Comparision.
Map display shows night mode
Calculating other routes

 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Other Routes.

The system calculates the other routes.
After the routes have been calculated,
you will see all calculated routes on the
map and, on the right-hand side, route
information as well as the route menu.






Current vehicle position
Route “Minimize Freeway”
Route “Shortest Distance”
Route information display
Route menu
Colored symbol
Destination (Icon )
Route “Shortest Time”
The various routes are indicated with
differently colored symbols  in the route
menu . The routes displayed on the map
are also colored accordingly.
The route comparison list appears.
It contains the following reference
information for each route:
Journey time
Journey distance
 To close the list: Briefly press
the  button.
Selecting a route and starting route
guidance
 Select a route in the Route menu or in
the route comparison list.
The Options menu appears again.
233
Navigation
Functions after entering the destination
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Start Route Guidance.
The system starts route guidance, see
the section “Route guidance” on
page 235.
Simulate route
This function simulates the journey to the
entered destination.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Simulate Route.
The system simulates the journey to the
entered destination.
 To cancel the simulation: Briefly
press the  button.
Change route
You can use this function to add up to four
waypoints to the route, to change the order
of the waypoints, to show destinations in the
map and to delete destinations.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Change Route.
The Waypoint menu appears.
 Continue as described in the section
“Change route” on page 239.
234
Navigation
Route guidance
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Safety instructions
WARNING
During route guidance, the following factors
may increase the accident hazard:
Distraction from the traffic situation.
Failure to observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities.
Inappropriate audible driving
recommendations or route guidance
displays as a result of the reality not
matching the data on the digital map,
for example due to road works or
modified road routing.
Always observe traffic signs, traffic
regulations and road safety facilities. They
always have priority over the audible driving
recommendations or route guidance
displays by the system.
General information
Route guidance displays
Route guidance starts after the route has
been calculated and the appropriate menu
item has been selected.
The route guidance displays are only
visible if the display is switched to map
display and if the map display is in position
mode and not scroll mode.
During route guidance, the system guides
you to the destination by means of audible
driving recommendations and route
guidance displays.
If you leave the recommended route, the
system automatically calculates a new
route to your destination.
Audible driving recommendations
In the section “Guidance volume settings”
from page 207, you will find information on
the following:
Setting the volume of the audible
driving recommendations
Activating/deactivating audible driving
recommendations
Calling up a current audible driving
recommendation
For information on position mode, refer to
the section “Position/scroll mode within the
map display” on page 204.
 To switch the display to map display
or the map display to position mode:
Press the  button.
The display switches and the system
simultaneously outputs a current
audible driving recommendation.
Sample displays
A number of sample displays are shown on
the next page.
235
Navigation
Route guidance
Map display shows night mode
Map display shows night mode






Remaining distance/journey time to
destination
Current vehicle position
Route
Waypoints (Yellow icon )
Main destination (Icon )
Junction zoom
When a driving manoeuvre is imminent, the
map display is automatically split. The lefthand side of the display shows the current
map view, while the right-hand side shows
the junction zoom. The split is automatically
cancelled once the driving manoeuvre is
completed.
236



Next driving manoeuvre and distance to
it
Point at which the next driving
manoeuvre takes place
Distance indicator to the next driving
manoeuvre
Right-hand side of the display with
junction zoom
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Suspending route guidance
 To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the 
button.
The map display appears.
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Cancel/Suspend.
Route guidance is suspended; you
will see an appropriate display that
disappears after a short time.
Resuming route guidance
You can resume route guidance after
suspension without having to re-enter the
destination.
 To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the 
button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Show Route.
You will once more see the map display
with the calculated route and the
Options menu.
The map display appears.
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Resume Guidance.
You will see an appropriate display that
automatically disappears after a short
time. The system then resumes route
guidance.
Show route
During route guidance, you can display the
complete calculated route again.
Map display shows day mode


Calculated route
Options menu
 To display the route again: Press
the  button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
237
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
The following functions are now
available in the Options menu:
Going back to map screen and
resuming route guidance:
If waypoints have been entered, the
waypoints (Yellow icons ),
including the journey times to the
destinations.
Roads to be traveling, including the
length of the route to be travelled.
 Select the menu item Goto Map
Screen.
Changing the route:
 Select the menu item Change
Route.
The Waypoint menu appears.
Please see the section “Change
route” on page 239 for the rest of
the description of this function.
Displaying the “Turn by Turn” list:
Please see the following
description.
Current vehicle position and the
destination (Icon ), including the
journey time to the destination.
The route section list is not refreshed while
it is on-screen.
Scrolling through the list
 To scroll line by line: Turn   the
controller .
 To scroll page by page: Push  
the controller .
Displaying the “Turn by Turn” list
Closing the list
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Turn by Turn.
 Briefly press the  button.
The “Turn by Turn” list containing the
following information about the route
appears.
238
Reroute/detour
You can use the reroute function to switch
route guidance to one of the four possible
alternative routes. The alternative routes
must have been calculated in advance,
see the section “Other routes” on page 233.
You can use the detour function to block a
specific stretch of the route section still to be
travelled for the route guidance. The system
then calculates a detour route if possible.
Calling up the Route menu
 To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the 
button.
The map display appears.
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Reroute/Detour.
The Route menu appears, the current
active route is marked with the icon .
Now you can select another route or
block a route section.
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
Reroute
 Select one of the following menu items:
Shortest Time
Shortest Distance
Minimize Freeway
Minimize Toll Road
Switching the remaining distance/
journey time display
If the map display is in position mode, the
system can either show the remaining
distance/journey time to the main
destination or to the next waypoint. You can
use this function to switch the display.
The system calculates a new route.
Detour
 Select one of the following menu items:
Detour 1 mi or Detour 1 km
Detour 2 mi or Detour 2 km
Detour 5 mi or Detour 5 km
Detour 10 mi or Detour 10 km
Depending on the menu item selected,
the relevant stretch in the route section
still be to travelled will be blocked and
the system will start to calculate the
route.
The labelling of the menu items (mi or km)
depends on the settings, see section “Map
display settings”, subsection “Function
Display Miles/Display Km” on page 259.
Map display shows day mode

Remaining distance/journey time
indicator
Icon = main destination
Yellow icon = waypoint
 To call up the map display in
position mode: Briefly press the 
button.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Distance to or Distance to .
The display is switched.
Change route
The following waypoint functions are
available:
Opening/closing the waypoint menu,
see page 240
Adding waypoints, see page 240
Changing the order of the destinations,
see page 241
Showing destinations in the map, see
page 242
Deleting a waypoint or the main
destination, see page 242
Deleting all waypoints and the main
destination, see page 242
The map display appears.
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
239
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
Opening/closing the waypoint menu
 Press the  button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
 To open the waypoint menu: In the
Navigation main menu, select the menu
item Change Route.
The Waypoint menu appears.
Further functions are available in the
Options menu, for example start route
guidance. Please see the section “Options
menu” on page 232 for a description of the
Options menu.


Main destination (Icon )
Waypoints (Yellow icons )
Current position
 To close the Waypoint menu: Select
the menu item Done.
You will see the calculated route and
the Options menu.
240
 Select the list item Previous
Destinations.
You can add up to two waypoints to the
route.
 Select a destination. Please see from
the section “Entering a destination via
the Previous Destinations” on page 215
onwards for the rest of this function.
 In the Waypoint menu, select the menu
item Add Waypoint.
Entering a waypoint via Intersection
input
Adding waypoints
A selection list appears. You now have
several options for entering a waypoint,
see the following descriptions.

Entering a waypoint via the Previous
Destinations
You have further operation options after
you have added waypoints, see the
section “After waypoints have been
added” on page 241
Entering a waypoint via the address
 Select the list item Address.
 Enter the address. Please see from the
section “Entering a destination via the
address” on page 210 onwards for the
rest of the description of this function.
 Select the list item Intersection.
 Enter the streets. Please see from the
section “Entering a destination via
Intersection input” on page 215
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering a POI as a waypoint
 Select the list item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
 Option 1: In the POI main menu, select
the menu item Name and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section “Entering a POI destination via
POI name” on page 216 onwards for
the rest of this function.
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
 Option 2: In the POI main menu, select
the menu item Category and enter a
POI destination. Please see from the
section “Entering a POI destination via
POI category” on page 220 onwards for
the rest of this function.
 Option 3: In the POI main menu, select
the menu item Phone Number and
enter a POI destination. Please see
from the section “Entering a POI
destination via POI phone number” on
page 223 onwards for the rest of this
function.
Entering a waypoint via the Address
Book
 Select the list item Address Book.
 Select a destination. Please see from
the section “Entering a destination via
the Address Book” on page 227
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering an emergency destination as a
waypoint
 Select the list item Emergency.
 Select a emergency category. Please
see from the section “Entering an
emergency destination” on page 228
onwards for the rest of this function.
Entering a waypoint via the map
The following functions are now available:
 Select the list item Map.
Changing the order of the destinations,
see page 241
Showing destinations in the map,
see page 242
Deleting a waypoint or the main
destination, see page 242
Deleting all waypoints and the main
destination, see page 242
 Select a destination in the map. Please
see from the section “Entering a
destination via the map” on page 229
onwards for the rest of this function.
After waypoints have been added
If the vehicle is moving, the new route is
immediately calculated after a waypoint is
added. The new waypoint was added as
the second last destination. The main
destination remains the last destination, an
existing waypoint is moved accordingly.
If the vehicle is stationary, the Waypoint
menu appears after a waypoint is added.
The new waypoint was added as the
second last destination. The main
destination remains the last destination, an
existing waypoint is moved accordingly.
 To change the position of the added
waypoint: Turn   the controller 
until the destination is at the desired
position.
Changing the order of the destinations
 Highlight a destination in the Waypoint
menu.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Change Order.
 Turn   the controller  until the
destination is at the desired position.
 Press the controller .
This confirms the new position.
 Press the controller .
This confirms the position.
241
Navigation
Functions during route guidance
Showing destinations in the map
 Highlight a destination in the Waypoint
menu.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show on Map.
The map display appears. It shows the
selected destination.
 To change the map scale: Turn  
the controller  until the desired scale
is reached.
 To return to the Waypoint menu:
Briefly press the  button.
The display automatically switches back to
the Waypoint menu after a certain time
without operation.
242
Deleting a waypoint or the main
destination
Deleting all waypoints and the main
destination
 Highlight a waypoint or the main
destination in the Waypoint menu.
 Highlight a waypoint in the Waypoint
menu.
 Push  the controller .
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the relevant
destination.
 Select Yes or No.
The destination will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
The Navigation main menu automatically
appears if there are no more destinations.
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all waypoints.
 Select Yes or No.
All waypoints and the main destination
will be deleted or retained, depending
on the answer selected. The Navigation
main menu automatically appears after
the deletion.
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
In the sample illustration below, the next
three stations are exits.
Map display shows night mode
As soon as you start driving on a normal
road, the system will automatically show
you a turn list, provided the function “Show
Turn by Turn” is activated and no driving
manoeuvre is imminent.
If this function is activated, but the function
“Show Freeway Mode” is deactivated, the
system will show the turn list also when
driving on freeways
Please refer to the section “Map display
settings” on page 258 to find out how to
activate or deactivate the function.

The turn list shows you the following:
Freeway mode
As soon as you start driving on a freeway,
the system will automatically show you
freeway information provided the function
“Show Freeway Mode” is activated and no
driving manoeuvre is imminent.
Please refer to the section “Map display
settings” on page 258 to find out how to
activate or deactivate the function.
The freeway mode shows you the
following:
The next three stations on the freeway
as icons, e.g. rest areas or exits,
the distance to the stations,
the available services at the stations,
the freeway currently being driven on
and
turns as icons.
Turn List




Direction to turn to continue following
the route (only visible if a route
guidance is active)
Icons for the next three stations
Icons showing the available services at
the station
Distance to the station
Freeway currently being driven on
The next three turns,
the kind of the turns as icons,
the distance to the turns and
the road currently being driven on.
243
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
Initiating a phone call to a POI
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
If the map is in scroll mode and the center
point of the crosshairs points to a POI, you
can initiate a call to the POI.
Map display shows day mode








Direction to turn to continue following
the route (only visible if a route
guidance is active)
First turn with corresponding icon
Second turn with corresponding icon
Third turn or destination (as shown in
the illustration) with corresponding icon
Distance to the third turn or to the
destination
Distance to the second turn
Distance to the first turn
Road currently being driven on
This function is only available if the following
conditions are met:
The digital map contains a unique
phone number of the POI.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
 To set the map to scroll mode: Push
the controller  in any direction
(     ).
The crosshairs appear.
 To move the map: Push and hold the
controller  in any direction
(     ) until the center of the
crosshairs points to a POI.
 To confirm the POI: Press the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item POI Info.
For information on map scroll mode, refer to
the section “Position/scroll mode within the
map display” on page 204.
A second Options menu appears.
 To call up the map display: Press
the  button.
The map display appears. The map is
set to position mode.
Map display shows day mode



244
Crosshairs
Options menu
Menu item Dial Number
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
 To initiate a phone call to the POI: In
the Options menu, select the menu item
Dial Number.
The system initiates the call.
 To call up the map display: Briefly
press the  button.
The map display appears.
Traffic information
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
If you have subscribed to the service XM
NavTraffic®, the Driver Information System
is able to:
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item NavTraffic Info.
Automatically receive traffic information
provided by XM® Satellite Radio,
display the Traffic Info list, see
page 245,
display the traffic information in the
map, see page 246 and
take the traffic information into account
during route guidance.
For further information about XM® Satellite
Radio please refer to section “XM® Satellite
Radio information” on page 56 and visit the
following website:
 To sort the Traffic Info list: Select the
menu item .
The list is resorted.
The Options menu appears.
You will see the Traffic Info list.



www.xmradio.com

Displaying the Traffic Info list

The Traffic Info list contains the available
traffic information.

Road affected by the traffic incident
Traffic incident
Sorting menu item
Distance from the vehicle position to the
traffic incident
Direction to the traffic incident in a
straight line
Icon for the traffic incident
245
Navigation
Functions independent of route guidance
The labelling of the menu item 
always shows the current sorting
status. It will change with every
selection.
Possible labelings:
Sort by Distance
Sort by Icon
The sorting status is also identified by
the icon to the left of the menu item .
Icon
= List is sorted by distance
Icon
= List is sorted by icon
The menu item  cannot be selected if the
list contains fewer than three entries.
 To show further information: Select a
list entry.
You will see the further information.
 To go back to the Traffic Info list:
Briefly press the  button.
Displaying the traffic information in the
map
If the function “Show Traffic Info on Map” is
activated, the traffic information will be
shown in the map. Please refer to the
section “Map display settings” on page 258
to find out how to activate or deactivate the
function “Show Traffic Info on Map”.
The traffic information will be shown in the
map in form of green, yellow and red lines
beside the roads affected by the
information.
Corresponding icons will be displayed also,
the icons are the same as in the Traffic Info
list, see previous illustration.
Map display shows day mode





Road (red line)
Yellow line (moderate traffic
congestion)
Red line (heavy traffic congestion)
Green line (free flow traffic)
Incident icon
The position of the lines (on the right or on
the left side of the road) shows which side
of the road is affected.
246
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Entering a destination via the map
and saving it
Option 1 (for all categories)
Address Book categories
The Address Book is divided into the
following categories:
Home
Work
Favorite Point 1
Favorite Point 2
Favorite Point 3
Favorite Point 4
Address List
You can assign each of the categories
Home, Work, Favorite Point 1, Favorite
Point 2, Favorite Point 3 or Favorite
Point 4 a destination of your choice.
The category Address List holds a
maximum of 200 destinations that you
can define yourself.
The following description assumes that
there is no destination stored in the
categories mentioned above. If there is
already a destination stored, proceed as
described in the section “Editing Address
Book entries” page 254.
Selecting a Address Book category
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
 In the Address Book editing menu,
select one of the menu items Set
Home, Set Work, Set Favorite Point
1, Set Favorite Point 2, Set Favorite
Point 3 or Set Favorite Point 4.
 Select the menu item Address List
followed by the menu item Add
Address followed by the menu item
Map.
In both cases, the map display appears.
Selecting the destination in the map
 To move the map/set the map scale:
Proceed as described in the section
“Moving the map/setting the map scale”
on page 206.
Saving the destination
 To open the Options menu: Press the
controller .
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Set Home or Set Work or Set
Favorite Point 1 or Set Favorite Point
2 or Set Favorite Point 3 or Set
Favorite Point 4 or Add Address.
The crosshairs position is saved as the
destination in the previously selected
category.
or
247
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
When saving, the system sets the
corresponding icon in the map at the
destination position; the icons remain
visible in the map even after the save
operation.
= Icon for Home
= Icon for Work
= Icon for Favorite Point 1 (Green
colored pin)
= Icon for Favorite Point 2 (Orange
colored pin)
Option 2 (only for the category Address
List)
 To call up the map display: Press
the  button.
 To move the map/set the map scale:
Proceed as described in the section
“Moving the map/setting the map scale”
on page 206.
 To save the crosshairs center as the
destination: Press the controller .
The Options menu appears.
= Icon for Favorite Point 3 (Blue
colored pin)
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Add to Address Book.
= Icon for Favorite Point 4 (Purple
colored pin)
= Icon for destinations saved in the
Address Book category Address List
(Red colored pin)
The menu item Add to Address Book
cannot be selected if there are already
200 destinations saved in this category.
When saving a destination in the category
Address List, the system automatically
uses the address as the destination name.
You can edit the name and assign a
different icon later, see the section “Editing
an entry” on page 254.
You cannot edit the icon and name with the
other Address Book categories.
248
The crosshairs center will be saved as
destination in the category Address
List. When saving, the system sets the
standard icon (Red colored pin) in the
map at the destination position; this
icon remains visible in the map even
after the save operation.
The system automatically uses the
address as the destination name when
saving. You can edit the name and
assign a different icon later, see the
section “Editing an entry” on page 254.
Entering the destination by
conventional means and saving it
The following description assumes that
there is no destination stored in the
categories Home, Work, Favorite Point 1,
Favorite Point 2, Favorite Point 3 and
Favorite Point 4. If there is already a
destination stored, proceed as described in
the section “Editing Address Book entries”
on page 254.
Selecting an Address Book category
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
 Option 1: In the Address Book editing
menu, select one of the menu items Set
Home, Set Work, Set Favorite Point
1, Set Favorite Point 2, Set Favorite
Point 3 or Set Favorite Point 4.
 Option 2: In the Address Book editing
menu, select the menu item Address
List followed by the menu item Add
Address.
After choosing an option, a selection list
appears. Now you have several options
to enter a destination.
Entering a destination
Entering a destination via the address
 Select the list item Address.
 Enter the address. Please see from the
section “Entering a destination via the
address” on page 210 onwards for the
rest of the description of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section “After a destination has been
entered” on page 250.
Entering a destination via the Previous
Destinations
 Select the list item Previous
Destinations.
 Select a destination. Please see from
the section “Entering a destination via
the Previous Destinations” on page 215
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section “After a destination has been
entered” on page 250.
Entering a destination via Intersection
input
 Select the list item Intersection.
 Enter the streets. Please see from the
section “Entering a destination via
Intersection input” on page 215
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section “After a destination has been
entered” on page 250.
Entering a POI as a destination
 Select the list item Point of Interest.
The POI main menu appears.
 Option 1: In the POI main menu, select
the menu item Name and enter a POI
destination. Please see from the
section “Entering a POI destination via
POI name” on page 216 onwards for
the rest of this function.
 Option 2: In the POI main menu, select
the menu item Category and enter a
POI destination. Please see from the
section “Entering a POI destination via
POI category” on page 220 onwards for
the rest of this function.
 Option 3: In the POI main menu, select
the menu item Phone Number and
enter a POI destination. Please see
from the section “Entering a POI
destination via POI phone number” on
page 223 onwards for the rest of this
function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section “After a destination has been
entered” on page 250.
249
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
Entering a destination via the Address
Book
 Select the list item Address Book.
 Select a destination. Please see from
the section “Entering a destination via
the Address Book” on page 227
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section “After a destination has been
entered” on page 250.
Entering an emergency destination
 Select the list item Emergency.
 Select a emergency category. Please
see from the section “Entering an
emergency destination” on page 228
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
section “After a destination has been
entered” on page 250.
Entering a destination via the map
Saving the destination
 Select the list item Map.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Set Home or Set Work or Set
Favorite Point 1 or Set Favorite Point
2 or Set Favorite Point 3, Set Favorite
Point 4 or Add Address.
 Select a destination in the map. Please
see from the section “Entering a
destination via the map” on page 229
onwards for the rest of this function.
You have further operation options after
you have entered a destination, see the
following description.
After a destination has been entered
After you have entered a destination, you
will see the destination on the map and, on
the right-hand side of the display,
information about the destination as well as
the Options menu.
The Options menu offers access to the
following functions:
Saving the destination, see page 250.
Adjusting the destination position,
see page 251.
Initiating a call to a POI, see page 251.
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example.
250
The destination is saved.
When saving, the system sets the
corresponding icon in the map at the
destination position; the icons remain
visible in the map even after the save
operation.
= Icon for Home
= Icon for Work
= Icon for Favorite Point 1 (Green
colored pin)
= Icon for Favorite Point 2 (Orange
colored pin)
= Icon for Favorite Point 3 (Blue
colored pin)
= Icon for Favorite Point 4 (Purple
colored pin)
= Icon for destinations saved in the
Address Book category Address List
(Red colored pin)
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
When saving a destination in the category
Address List, the system automatically
uses the address as the destination name.
You can edit the name and assign a
different icon later, see the section “Editing
an entry” on page 254.
You cannot edit the icon and name with the
other Address Book categories.
Initiating a call to a POI
POIs (points of interest) include gas
stations, restaurants and banks, for
example. This function is only available if
the following conditions are met:
The entered destination is a POI.
The digital map contains the phone
number of the POI.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Dial Number.
The system initiates the call.
Adjusting the destination position
Deleting destinations
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Adjust Position.
Deleting all destinations in the category
Previous Destinations
The Options menu is closed.
 Keep moving the map until the
destination position is in the crosshairs.
To do so, proceed as described in the
section “Moving the map/setting the
map scale” on page 206.
 To confirm the position: Press the
controller .
If the position is invalid, you will see an
appropriate message.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
You can adapt the destination
position again.
If the position is valid, the Options menu
reappears and all previously described
options are once more available.
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
 In the Address Book editing menu,
select the menu item Delete Previous
Dest.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all destinations in the
category.
 Select Yes or No.
The destinations will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
251
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
Deleting a single destination or all
destinations in the category Address
List
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
The Navigation main menu appears.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
 In the Address Book editing menu,
select the menu item Address List.
The destination list appears.
 To sort the list by date of storage or
alphabetical: Select the menu item
Sort by Date or Sort Alphabetically.
The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.
The list is resorted and the text of the
menu item and the icon to the left of the
menu item change accordingly, both
always show the current status.
252
Icon
= List is sorted by date of
storage.
Icon
= List is sorted alphabetical.
 Highlight a destination.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
Showing the highlighted destination in
the map
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show on Map.
You will see the destination in the map.
 To set the map scale: Turn   the
controller  until the desired scale is
reached.
 To close the map display: Press
the  button or do nothing for a
certain time.
Deleting the highlighted destination
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the destination.
 Select Yes or No.
The destination will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
Deleting all destinations
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all the destinations.
 Select Yes or No.
The destinations will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
Navigation
Saving/deleting destinations in the Adress Book
Deleting a destination in a category
except Previous Destinations and
Address List
 To set the map scale: Turn   the
controller  until the desired scale is
reached.
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 To close the map display: Press
the  button or do nothing for a
certain time.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
 In the Address Book editing menu,
highlight one of the menu items Home,
Work, Favorite Point 1, Favorite
Point 2, Favorite Point 3 or Favorite
Point 4.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
Deleting the highlighted destination
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the destination.
 Select Yes or No.
The destination will be deleted or
retained, depending on the answer
selected.
Showing the highlighted destination in
the map
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Show on Map.
You will see the destination in the map.
253
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Selecting an Address Book entry
In all categories except Address List
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
 In the Address Book editing menu,
select one of the menu items Home,
Work, Favorite Point 1, Favorite
Point 2, Favorite Point 3 or Favorite
Point 4.
The editing menu for the selected entry
appears and you can edit the entry, see
the section “Editing an entry” on
page 254.
254
In the category Address List
 Select an entry.
 To open the Navigation main menu:
Press the  button.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Edit Addr. Book.
The Address Book editing menu
appears.
The editing menu for the selected entry
appears and you can edit the entry, see
the following description.
Editing an entry
Editing menu
 In the Address Book editing menu,
select the category Address List.
The destination list appears.
 To sort the list by date of storage or
alphabetical: Select the menu item
Sort by Date or Sort Alphabetically.
The list is resorted and the text of the
menu item and the icon to the left of the
menu item change accordingly, both
always show the current status.
Icon
= List is sorted by date of
storage.
Icon
= List is sorted alphabetical.
The menu item cannot be selected if the list
contains fewer than three entries.




Name data field
Icon data field
Position data field
Phone number data field
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
The following functions are available in the
editing menu:
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
Displaying details, see page 255
The complete entry is displayed.
Editing the name, see page 255
Switching the name display on/off,
see page 256
 To close the details display: Press
the controller .
Assigning a different icon, see
page 256
Changing the destination position,
see page 256
Editing a phone number, see page 257
Displaying details
If the entries in the position or name data
field are too long, the system abbreviates
the entries. You can display the complete
entry using this function.
Displaying position details
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
the position data field in the editing
menu and push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The complete entry is displayed.
 To close the details display: Press
the controller .
Editing the name
Displaying name details
This function is only available if you edit an
entry of the category Address List.
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
the name data field in the editing menu
and push  the controller .
The name of the entry in the categories
Home and Work cannot be edited.
You can enter a maximum of 50 characters
for a name.
 To initiate editing: Select the name
data field in the editing menu.
The speller appears and you can now
edit the name.
 To enter a character: Proceed as
described in the chapter “PHONE”,
section “Entering a name” on page 191.
 To delete the last character entered:
Select the menu item .
 To delete all characters: Select the
menu item Delete All.
 To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
If a Address Book entry with this name
already exists, you will see an
appropriate message.
 To close the message: Press the
controller .
You can edit the name again.
The Options menu appears.
255
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
Switching the name display on/off
Assigning a different icon
Changing the destination position
The system displays Address Book entries
in the map using appropriate icons. In
addition to the icons, the system can also
display the destination names. You can
activated/deactivate this display, except for
the categories Home and Work.
The system displays Address Book entries
in the map using appropriate icons.
You can use this function to assign an
Address Book entry an icon other than the
standard icon.
You cannot assign a different icon for the
entry in the categories Home, Work,
Favorite Point 1, Favorite Point 2,
Favorite Point 3 and Favorite Point 4.
 Select the position data field in the
editing menu.
 To open the Options menu: Highlight
the name data field in the editing menu
and push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Name on Map.
The name display will be activated or
deactivated, depending on the previous
status. The status display to the left of
the menu item will change accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
 To open the Icon menu: Select the
icon data field in the editing menu.
The Icon menu appears.
 To select an icon: In the Icon menu,
highlight the desired icon and press the
controller .
 To confirm the selection and assign
the icon: Select the menu item OK.
 To reassign the standard icon: In the
Icon menu, select the menu item
Delete.
The map display appears.
 To set the map scale: Turn   the
controller  until the desired scale is
reached.
 To move the map: Push and hold the
controller  in any direction ( ,
  or  ).
The map moves accordingly.
 To confirm the change: Press the
controller .
The editing menu appears again.
 To cancel the change: Press the 
button.
 To display address data in full:
Highlight the position data field in the
editing menu and push  the
controller .
The Options menu appears.
256
Navigation
Editing Address Book entries
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
Deleting a phone number/Initiating a call
to a phone number
The menu item Details can only be selected
if the address data exceeds a certain length.
 Highlight the phone number data field in
the editing menu.
The address data is displayed in full.
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Editing a phone number
You can enter a maximum of 20 characters
for a phone number.
 Select the phone number data field in
the editing menu.
The speller appears and you can now
edit the phone number.
 To enter a character: Proceed as
described in the section “PHONE”,
section “Entering a name” on page 191.
 To delete the last character entered:
Select the menu item .
 To delete all characters: Select the
menu item Delete All.
The Options menu appears.
 To delete the phone number: In the
Options menu, select the menu item
Delete.
The phone number is deleted.
 To initiate a call: In the Options menu,
select the menu item Dial Number.
The menu item Dial Number can only be
selected if the following conditions are met:
The Address Book entry contains a
phone number.
There is a mobile phone connected with
the system.
 To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
257
Navigation
Settings
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Ferry preference settings,
see page 260
Avoid Area settings, see page 260
Opening the Settings menu
 Press the  button.
Displaying navigation information,
see page 264
Reset function, see page 264
The Navigation main menu appears.
 In the Navigation main menu, select the
menu item Settings.
The Settings menu appears.
 To close the menus: Press the 
button repeatedly until all of the menus
are closed.
You can access the following functions in
the Settings menu:
Guidance Volume settings, see the
section “Guidance volume settings” on
page 207.
Map display settings, see page 258
258
Function Display Mode
You can use this function to switch the map
display to day, night or automatic mode.
 Open the Map Display settings menu,
see “Opening the Map Display settings
menu” on page 258.
Map display settings
 In the Map Display settings menu,
highlight the menu item Display Mode.
Opening the Map Display settings menu
 Push  the controller .
 Open the Settings menu, see the
section “Opening the Settings menu”
on page 258.
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Map Display.
The Map display settings menu
appears in which you can activate,
deactivate and switch various functions.
The functions are listed below.
 To close the menu: Briefly press
the  button.
The Options menu appears. The
icon  to the left of a menu item
indicates the currently active setting.
 Select the desired setting.
If you select the setting Auto, the map
display mode will be automatically switched
as a function of the vehicle illumination.
Navigation
Settings
Function Display Miles/Display Km
You can use this function to switch the
measuring unit of distance values from
miles to kilometers or vice versa.
 Open the Map Display settings menu,
see “Opening the Map Display settings
menu” on page 258.
 Open the Map Display settings menu,
see “Opening the Map Display settings
menu” on page 258.
 In the Map Display settings menu,
select the menu item Time To
Destination.
The corresponding menu appears.
 In the Map Display settings menu,
select the menu item Display Miles or
Display Km.
Icon
= Measuring unit is set to
miles.
Icon
= Measuring unit is set to
kilometers.
You can use this function to set the average
vehicle speed used by the system as a basis
for calculating the remaining journey time to
destination. You can make separate
settings for three different road types.
 To close the menu: Push  the
controller .
 Open the Map Display settings menu,
see “Opening the Map Display settings
menu” on page 258.
 To activate/deactivate the function:
Select the corresponding menu item.



Function Time To Destination
The system saves this setting
automatically.
All other functions
The measuring unit is switched and the
text of the menu item and the icon to the
left of it change accordingly, both
always show the current status.
 To set the speed: Turn   the
controller  until the desired setting is
reached.
Road type
Indicator
Currently set speed
 To select a road type: Push   the
controller  repeatedly until the
desired road type is highlighted.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be activated or deactivated.
The status display to the left of the
menu item changes accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
The functions are listed below.
259
Navigation
Settings
Function Show Avoid Area
Resetting position tracking
If you activate this function, the system
can show you the so-called “Avoid Areas”,
see the section “Avoid Area settings” on
page 260.
Resetting position tracking deletes all
previously stored position information and
restarts position tracking.
Function Show Traffic Info on Map
This function depends on the validity of your
subscription to the XM NavTraffic® service.
If you have no subscription for the XM
NavTraffic® service, activating this function
will not show the traffic information on map
as described in this manual.
If you activate this function, the traffic
information will be displayed in the map on
receipt, see the section “Displaying the
traffic information in the map” on page 246.
Function Show Position Tracking
The system automatically tracks the
vehicle position. If you activate this
function, the system can show you the
tracked vehicle position in the map over
a distance of max. 124 mi (200 km) in the
form of a dotted line.
260
 Highlight the menu item Show Position
Tracking.
 Push  the controller .
The Options menu appears.
 Press the controller .
Position tracking is reset.
Ferry preference settings
With this function deactivated, route with
ferry will be considered with lowest priority
and only considered if there is no other route
without ferry possible.
With this function activated, route with ferry
will be considered in the same priority as
another route without ferry, so route with
ferry could also show up as shortest route.
 Open the Settings menu, see the
section “Opening the Settings menu”
on page 258.
 To activate/deactivate the function:
In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Ferry Preference.
Depending on the previous status, the
function will be activated or deactivated.
The status display to the left of the
menu item changes accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
Avoid Area settings
You can set up to ten areas which should be
avoided for route guidance.
Opening the Avoid Area main menu
 Open the Settings menu, see the
section “Opening the Settings menu” on
page 258.
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Avoid Area.
The Avoid Area main menu appears.
Navigation
Settings
Entry of a area is divided into the following
steps:
Entering a destination as the starting
point of the Avoid Area.
Defining the Avoid Area.
Defining the Avoid Area
After entering the destination, you will see
the map display with crosshairs. The
crosshairs center is set to the destination.
Entering a destination as the starting
point of the Avoid Area


List of Avoid Areas already stored
Avoid Area main menu
After opening the Avoid Area main menu,
the following options are available:
Adding an Avoid Area, see page 261
Map display shows night mode
Deleting Avoid Areas, see page 262

Editing Avoid Areas, see page 263
Now you can define the top left corner of
the Avoid Area.
Adding an Avoid Area
 In the Avoid Area main menu, select the
menu item Add Avoid Area.
A selection list appears. Now you can
enter the desired area.
 Select one of the menu items to enter a
destination. Please see from the
section “Entering a destination” on
page 249 onwards.
Crosshairs
 To set the map scale: Turn   the
controller  until the desired scale is
reached.
 To move the crosshairs: Push and
hold the controller  in any direction
(     ).
The crosshairs moves accordingly.
261
Navigation
Settings
 To define the top left point: Press the
the controller .
Deleting Avoid Areas
Deleting a single area
Now you can define the bottom right corner
of the Avoid Area.
 In the Avoid Area main menu, highlight
the desired area.
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
The Options menu appears.
Map display shows night mode



Map display shows night mode

Already defined top left corner
 To set the map scale and to move the
crosshairs: Proceed as previously
described when defining the top left
point.
 To define the bottom right point:
Press the the controller .
You will see the defined area in the
map.
262
Top left corner of the defined area
Defined area
Bottom right corner of the defined area
 To confirm the defined area: Press
the controller .
You will see the Avoid Area main menu
again. The defined area is stored and
appears in the menu. You can edit the
name, see section “Editing the name”
on page 263.
 To show the area in the map: In the
Options menu, select the men item
Show on Map.
You will see the area in the map.
 To set the map scale: Turn   the
controller  until the desired scale is
reached.
 To close the map display: Press
the  button or do nothing for a
certain time.
 To delete the area: In the Options
menu, select the menu item Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the area.
Navigation
Settings
 Select Yes or No.
The area will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
Deleting all areas
Editing Avoid Areas
Opening the editing menu
 In the Avoid Area main menu, select the
desired area.
 In the Avoid Area main menu, select
any area you like.
The editing menu appears
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Delete All.
 To delete the last character: Select
the menu item .
 To enter a character: Proceed as
described in the chapter “PHONE”,
section “Entering a name” on page 191.
 To complete editing: Select the menu
item OK.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete all areas.
All areas will be deleted or retained,
depending on the answer selected.
The speller appears and you can now
edit the name.
 To delete all characters: Select the
menu item Delete All.
The Options menu appears.
 Select Yes or No.
 Press the controller .
Displaying name details



Name data field of the Avoid Area
Position data fields of the Avoid Area
Display of the current status
Editing the name
 Open the editing menu, see the section
“Opening the editing menu” on
page 263.
If the entry in the name data field is too long,
the system abbreviates the entry. You can
display the complete entry using this
function.
 Open the editing menu, see the section
“Opening the editing menu” on
page 263.
 In the editing menu, highlight the menu
item Avoid Area.
263
Navigation
Settings
 In the editing menu, highlight the menu
item Avoid Area and push  the
controller .
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item On or Off.
Depending on the menu item selected,
the status will be set accordingly.
The Options menu appears.
 In the Options menu, select the menu
item Details.
The complete entry is displayed.
 To close the details display: Press
the controller .
Setting the status
If you set the status to on, the navigation
system will try to avoid the area for route
guidance. If you set the status to off, the
navigation system will not try to avoid the
area for route guidance.
Displaying navigation information
 Open the Settings menu, see the
section “Opening the Settings menu” on
page 258.
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item NAVI Information.
The Information menu appears.
This function resets the navigation settings
to their factory settings. The Address Book
data except the previous destinations will
not be reset.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to reset the settings.
 Select Yes or No.




264
Reset function
 In the Settings menu, select the menu
item Factory Reset.
 In the editing menu, highlight the menu
item Use Avoid Area.
The Options menu appears.
 To close the Information menu:
Press the  button.
 Open the Settings menu, see the
section “Opening the Settings menu”
on page 258.
 Open the editing menu, see the section
“Opening the editing menu” on
page 263.
 To open the Options menu: Push 
the controller .
Adequate GPS reception must be available
for the displays  and . The altitude
display  may differ from reality because
the system calculates it using the GPS
signals.
Geo-coordinates of the current vehicle
position
Current vehicle position in feet above
sea level
GPS reception quality
Version number of the digital map
The settings will or will not be reset,
depending on the answer you select.
Navigation
Settings
North up view/Heading up view
Map mode
You can use this function to set whether the
map is oriented to the north or the direction
of travel.
The following functions are available:
 To call up the map display: Briefly
press the  button.
The map display appears.
 To open the Map Options menu:
Press the controller .
The Map Options menu appears.
 In the Map Options menu, select the
menu item North Up View or Heading
Up View.
The map orientation is switched and the
text of the menu item and the icon to the
left of the menu item change
accordingly, both always show the
current status.
Icon
=fixed map orientation,
north is always at the top.
Icon
= dynamic map orientation,
driving direction is always at the top.
Show Turn by Turn
Show Freeway Mode
Function Show Turn by Turn
If you activate this function, the system
can show you a turn list on the right-hand
side of the display, see the section “Turn
List” on page 243.
Function Show Freeway Mode
 In the Map Options menu, select the
menu item Map Mode.
 To activate/deactivate a function:
Select the menu item Show Turn by
Turn or Show Freeway Mode.
Depending on the previous status, the
corresponding function will be activated
or deactivated. The status display to the
left of the menu item changes
accordingly.
Display  = function activated
Display  = function deactivated
If you activate this function, the system
can show you freeway information on the
right-hand side of the display, see the
section “Freeway mode” on page 243.
Activating/deactivating a function
 To call up the map display: Briefly
press the  button.
The map display appears.
 To open the Map Options menu:
Press the controller .
The Map Options menu appears.
265
Navigation
Settings
266
Voice control
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio) . . . . 273
DISC and AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
PHONE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Navigation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Various commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Command overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
267
Voice control
General information
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
Symbol #
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates an announcement by the system.
Safety instruction
Symbol $
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates information shown on the display.
WARNING
Stressful situations can affect the sound of
your voice and could result in a phone call
you want not being made quickly enough.
The distraction could result in you losing
control of the vehicle.
Do not operate the phone function using
voice control in an emergency.
Symbols
Some of the voice commands initiate a
dialog between the user and the voice
control system. A number of dialogs are
given in the user manual by way of
example.
The following symbols are used in the
sample dialogs:
Symbol !
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates a voice command by the user.
268
Symbol Ping %
In a sample dialog between the voice
control system and the user, this symbol
indicates the tone signalling that the voice
control system is ready for commands to be
entered.
Symbol ...*
Using your voice control system you can
call up station names, phonebook entries
or points of interest. These names are
represented by ...* in the sample dialogs.
Symbol ... (1-X)
If a set of brackets containing a number
range appears after the three points, these
three points indicate a number within this
range, for example “Disc ...(1-6)”.
Operating language
The voice control system can be operated
in English language. It doesn’t matter,
which system language is set in the System
settings.
General notes on operation
Voice control is activated by pressing
the  button on the steering wheel. This
allows you to operate the Driver Information
System without taking your hands from the
steering wheel.
The voice control system recognizes
commands or numerical sequences
regardless of who is speaking. It provides
audible feedback and guides you through
the functions.
If you say an incorrect or unavailable
command, the voice control system
responds with “Pardon?” and you can
repeat the command. After the 3rd failed
attempt, the system aborts the operation
and the dialog is terminated with “Cancel”.
Voice control
General information
You can cancel a dialog at any time by
pressing and holding the  button on the
steering wheel or by saying the command
“Cancel”.
The button  on the steering wheel has no
function when there is a phone call in
progress.
You can also cancel dialogs by pressing
any button on your Driver Information
System. This does not apply to the volume
control, which can still be used to adjust the
volume when a dialog is active.
Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle
when using the voice control system
(e.g. conversations between other
passengers going on at the same time).
The faster the vehicle is traveling, the
greater the ambient noise. You should
therefore speak more loudly at higher
speeds.
The hands-free microphone is directed
towards the driver's seat. The voice
control system should therefore be
operated by the driver.
On-screen symbol
Activating voice control
Reduce interference by closing
windows, doors and the sunroof.
 Option 2: Say the command “Cancel”.
The voice control system confirms with
“Cancel” and switches off.
Voice input
Speak continuously and at normal
volume. Avoid long pauses and
excessive emphasis.
 Option 1: Press and hold the  button
on the steering wheel for several
seconds.
Do not enter voice commands while an
announcement is being made.
General operation
You can quit the voice control system at any
time, even during a dialog.
Please refer also to the sections “Activating
voice control” on page 269, “Deactivating
voice control” on page 269 and “Setting the
volume” on page 270.
To ensure optimum voice recognition by
your voice control system, please observe
the following points:
Deactivating voice control
As soon as the voice control system is
activated and the ping has sounded, the
symbol
appears in the bottom status
line or in the navigation map.
 Briefly press the  button on the
steering wheel.
After the Ping % sounds, the voice control
system is ready to receive commands. If
you do not enter a command, the voice
control system will prompt you for one by
saying “Pardon?”.
It is not possible to activate the voice control
system while making or receiving a phone
call.

Voice control symbol
status line
in the bottom
269
Voice control
General information
Commands
The commands that you can use to operate
your voice control system are divided into
two categories:

Voice control symbol
navigation map
in the
You can call up the available local
commands whenever you use the
teleprompter. Please refer also to the
section “Help function (teleprompter)”
on page 271.
Setting the volume
The volume of the voice control system is
independent of the volume set for the
phone/audio system.
You can adjust the volume of the
announcements made by the voice control
system, for example in response to
variations in ambient noise during the
journey.
 Activate the voice control system and
say a command such as “Help”.
 During the subsequent announcement,
turn the volume control on your unit to
increase or lower the volume.
270
Local commands
Local commands can only be used
within the respective main function, for
example “Next track” when in DISC
mode.
Group commands
Group commands can be used within
any operating mode. They cover the
main functions, the individual operating
areas of your Driver Information System
and the help function.
Calling up the help function:
Help
Group commands for the main
functions:
Main menu
Group commands for tuner mode:
Radio commands
Station commands
Frequency commands
Group commands for DISC and AUX
mode:
Media commands
Disc commands
Track commands
Folder commands
Group commands for PHONE mode:
Phone commands
Voice control
General information
Group commands for Navigation mode:
Repeating input
Switching confirmation prompts on/off
Navigation commands
Address book commands
 Briefly press the  button during voice
input.
Spoken commands are repeated by the
voice control system when this function is
switched on.
Destination search commands
Route guidance commands
Map commands
The voice control system returns to the
point in the dialog where you started
your input and you can repeat it.
This function is described in the chapter
“INFO”, section “Rpt. Voice Commands” on
page 308.
Configuring voice control
Help function (teleprompter)
Skipping sections of a dialog
By briefly pressing the  button during an
active dialog you can skip a voice
announcement or return to the start of your
voice input and repeat it.
Switching the teleprompter on/off
The visual help is called teleprompter, see
example illustration below.
The help function comprises an acoustic
help component and a visual help
component, also called teleprompter.
The voice control system features an
integrated help function that is always
available.
Skipping voice announcements
 Briefly press the  button during a
voice announcement by the unit.
This help function is automatically activated
as soon as
The voice announcement is skipped
and the voice control system is ready
for the next voice input.
the system does not understand a voice
input
or
This function is described in the chapter
“INFO”, section “Show Voice Commands
(Teleprompter)” on page 308.
voice input is not made in the dialog.
The help function can also be activated at
any time using the command “Help”.
271
Voice control
General information
Automatically activated help function
The help function is automatically activated
as soon as the voice control system
identifies a problem with the voice input.
Help is then provided in two steps:
Step 1:
The commands from the top operating
level are displayed in the teleprompter.
You now have the option of reading the
desired command and continuing the
voice input. The second step of the help
function follows if voice input is not
continued or continued incorrectly.
Step 2:
The commands are displayed in the
teleprompter and said by the voice
control system.
Calling up the help function and using it
for operation
If you call up the help function using the
command “Help”, the commands are both
displayed in the teleprompter and said by
the voice control system.
272
If you activate the help function and repeat
one of the commands, you can then
activate the help function again. This is how
you access the available commands from
the next operating level.
You can also show the commands from an
operating area directly using the group
commands, for example “Phone
commands”.
Operating picklists
The voice control system can display
picklists to you on the screen, for example
the channel list in the XM® tuner mode.
Scrolling through a picklist
You can scroll through any picklist using
the commands “Next page”, “Previous
page”, “Back”, “First Page” or “Last Page”.
You can also scroll through a list using the
controller, see chapter “Functional
introduction”, section “Lists” on page 29.
Selecting an entry in a picklist
Within picklists, you have the following two
options for selecting an entry:
 Option 1: Say the contents as they are
displayed in the row.
 Option 2: Say the command
“Entry...(1-8)”.
You can also select an entry in a list using
the controller, see chapter “Functional
introduction”, section “Highlighting a menu
item” on page 28.
Voice control
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio)
Calling up tuner mode
Setting the frequency (FM or AM
tuner mode only)
 FM or AM tuner: Press the  button
on the steering wheel and say the
command “Radio” after the signal tone.
You can use the commands
FM or AM tuner mode is called up and
the appropriate main menu appears on
the display. The last selected station is
played.
 XM tuner: Press the  button on the
steering wheel and say the command
“XM” after the signal tone.
XM tuner mode is called up and the
XM® Satellite Radio menu appears on
the display. The last selected channel is
played.
Tuner mode help
You can use the command “Radio
commands” to listen to all the commands
available for FM, AM or XM® tuner mode.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Radio
commands” after the signal tone.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
“FM ...(87.7-107.9)”
“AM ...(530-1710)”
to enter a radio frequency directly.
®
®
Setting the waveband
You can use the commands “FM” or “AM”
to set the waveband.
See also “Setting the waveband” on
page 275 in the section “Operating
examples”.
Setting the FM mode
You can use the commands “FM1” or
“FM2” to set the desired FM mode.
The frequency can be entered anywhere
within the range of 87.7 -107.9 MHz (FM)
and 530 - 1710 KHz (AM).
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command for the
desired frequency after the signal tone,
for example “FM 97.5”.
The unit tunes to the desired frequency.
See also “Tuning to a radio station by
specifying the frequency (FM or AM
tuner mode only)” on page 275 in the
section “Operating examples”.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The desired FM mode is set.
273
Voice control
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio)
Next/previous station (FM and AM
tuner mode only)
Station search (FM and AM tuner
mode only)
Selecting channels (XM® tuner
mode only)
You can use the commands “Next station”
and “Previous station” to tune the unit to the
next or previous station stored in the
presets.
You can use the commands “Seek up” and
“Seek down” to start the station search. The
station search proceeds upwards or
downwards and stops at the next
receivable station.
You can use the command “Channel ...*” to
select XM® Satellite Radio channels
directly by the channel name.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired station.
Next/previous channel (XM® tuner
mode only)
You can use the commands “Next channel”
and “Previous channel” to tune the unit to
the next or previous channel stored in the
channel presets.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired channel.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the next receivable
station.
Selecting stations/channels stored
in the presets
You can use the command “Preset...(1-16)”
to tune the unit to a station/channel stored
in the corresponding preset.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say e.g. “Preset 4” after the
signal tone.
The unit tunes to the station/channel
stored in the preset 4.
274
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command
“Channel ...*” after the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the desired channel.
You can use the command “Channel...(1255)” to select XM® Satellite Radio
channels directly by the channel number.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say e.g. “Channel 10” after
the signal tone.
The unit tunes to the channel 10.
You can use the command “Channel by
name” to select a channel from a picklist,
see also “Selecting a channel (XM® tuner
mode only)” on page 275 in the section
“Operating examples”.
Voice control
Tuner mode (FM, AM and XM Satellite Radio)
Scan function (FM and AM tuner
mode only)
The Scan function searches through the
selected band, stops at a receivable station,
plays the station for five seconds and goes
to the next receivable station. It will not
search for FM HD RadioTM sub channels.
You can use the command “Scan” to start
the Scan function.
 To start the Scan function: Press the
 button on the steering wheel and
say the command “Scan” after the
signal tone.
The Scan function starts.
The Scan function will stop automatically, if
the frequency from where it has been
started is reached again.
It will also stop automatically, if you switch to
another audio/video source. After switching
back to AM/FM again, the system tunes to
the frequency from where the Scan function
has been started.
You can also stop the Scan function
manually.
Operating examples
Selecting a channel (XM® tuner mode
only)
Setting the waveband
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “FM.”
# “FM.”
# Ping %
! “Channel by name.”
# “Channel by name.”
$ The first page of the channel list is
The corresponding waveband is set.
displayed.
Tuning to a radio station by specifying
the frequency (FM or AM tuner mode
only)
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “FM ...(87.7-107.9).”
# “FM ...(87.7-107.9).”
The unit tunes to the specified radio
station.
“Please say the channel name”
Ping %
! “...* ”
# “...* ”
The unit tunes to the selected channel.
275
Voice control
DISC and AUX mode
Calling up DISC or AUX mode
 To call up DISC mode: Press the 
button on the steering wheel and say
the command “Disc” after the signal
tone.
DISC mode is called up and the
appropriate main menu appears on
the display.
If there is a disc inserted or there is a
disc in the magazine of the changer,
playback of the last track played will
start.
 To call up the last selected AUX
mode: Press the  button on the
steering wheel and say the command
“External device” after the signal tone.
The last selected AUX mode (iPod®,
USB or AUX signal source mode) is
called up and the appropriate main
menu appears on the monitor.
 To call a specific AUX mode: Press
the  button on the steering wheel
and say one of the following commands
after the signal tone:
“iPod”
“USB”
“AUX”
276
The corresponding AUX mode is called
up and the appropriate main menu
appears on the monitor.
DISC/AUX mode help
Next/previous disc
You can use the command “Next disc” or
“Previous disc” to skip to the next or
previous disc and automatically start
playback.
You can use the command “Media
commands” to listen to all the commands
available for DISC/AUX mode.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Media
commands” after the signal tone.
The system starts playback of the
corresponding disc.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Selecting a disc directly
You can use the command “Disc ...(1-6)” to
skip to the selected disc and automatically
start playback.
See also “Selecting a disc” on page 277 in
the section “Operating examples”.
Voice control
DISC and AUX mode
Next/previous folder
Selecting a track directly
You can use the command “Next folder” or
“Previous folder” to skip to the start of the
next or previous folder and automatically
start playback.
You can use the command “Track ...(1-99)”
to skip directly to a specific track.
Playback of the track starts automatically.
See also “Selecting a track” on page 278 in
the section “Operating examples”.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The system starts playback of the
corresponding folder.
Skipping tracks forwards/
backwards
You can use the command “Next track” or
“Previous track” to skip to the start of the
next or previous track and automatically
start playback.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The system starts playback of the
corresponding track.
Random Song/Album function
You can use the comand “Random song” to
activate the following functions:
Random play of all tracks (audio disc or
USB playback only)
Shuffle song function (iPod® playback
only)
In the case of audio DVDs, random play is
restricted to the tracks in the currently active
group.
You can use the command “Random
album” to activate random play of all tracks
in the currently active folder (MP3 and wma
disc playback only).
Random play ignores tracks in subfolders
within the currently active folder.
 To activate the RandomSong/Album
function: Press the  button on the
steering wheel and say the command
“Random song” or “Random album”
after the signal tone.
The corresponding function will be
activated.
 To deactivate the Random Song/
Album function: Press the  button
on the steering wheel and say the
command “Random stop”.
The Random Song/Album function will
be deactivated.
Operating examples
Selecting a disc
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Disc 3.”
# “Disc 3.”
The specified disc is played.
277
Voice control
DISC and AUX mode
Selecting a track
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Track 10.”
# “Track 10.”
The specified track is played.
278
Voice control
PHONE mode
PHONE commands can be used only while
a Bluetooth® mobile phone is connected
to the system, see chapter “PHONE”,
section “Pairing/connecting/disconnecting a
mobile phone” on page 153.
Redialing
You can use the command “Redial” to
redial the last number dialed.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Redial”
after the signal tone.
Calling up PHONE mode
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command
“Bluetooth” after the signal tone.
PHONE mode is called up and the
appropriate main menu appears on the
display.
The system starts redials the
corresponding number.
Dialing a number
Storing numbers in the phonebook
You can use the command “Dial number” to
dial a phone number.
You can use the command “Store number”
to store phone numbers in your phone's
phonebook.
See also “Storing a number and assigning
it to an existing phonebook entry” on
page 281 and “Storing a number and
creating a new phonebook entry” on
page 282 in the section “Operating
examples”.
Phone help
Use the numbers “zero” to “nine” to enter
the number.
You can use the command “Phone
commands” to show all the commands that
are available for your phone.
State the phone number in blocks of digits,
separated by short pauses. After each
sequence of numbers, the voice control
system repeats the recognized digits.
The recognized digits are also shown on
the display.
See also “Dialing a phone number” on
page 280 in the section “Operating
examples”.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Phone
commands”.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
279
Voice control
PHONE mode
Calling a phonebook entry
You can use the command “Call...*1” or
“Call by name” to place a call to a party
directly from your phonebook.
See also “Calling a number stored in the
phonebook” on page 280 in the section
“Operating examples”.
Operating examples
Dialing a phone number
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Dial number.”
# “Dial number.”
Ping %
$ A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
“Please say the number in groups of
digits.”
Ping %
! “1234”
# “1234”
Ping %
$ The teleprompter is opened with the
recognized phone number (1234) in
the first line and the number speller
with some options for numbers.
! “Dial.”
The phone number is dialed.
Calling a number stored in the
phonebook
There are three options available. Using
option 1, you can select a phonebook entry
from a picklist. Using option 2 and 3, you
can directly place a call without a picklist.
Option 1
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
1. Name of the phonebook entry
280
Voice control
PHONE mode
# Ping %
! “Call by name.”
# “Call by name.”
$ The first page of the phonebook picklist
is displayed.
Option 2
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Call...*1”
# “Call...*2.
Which category do you want to dial:
work, home, or mobile?”
! “Home”
The corresponding number is dialed.
Option 3
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
“Please say the name.”
Ping %
! “Alice Jeong.”
# “Alice Jeong.
Other available commands are:
“Call...*5 Work”
“Call...*6 Mobile”
Storing a number and assigning it to an
existing phonebook entry
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Store number.”
# “Store number.”
Ping %
$ A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
# Ping %
! “Call...*3 Home.”
# “Call...*4 Home.”
The corresponding number is dialed.
Which category do you want to dial:
work, home, or mobile?”
! “Home”
The corresponding number is dialed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Name of the phonebook entry
Name of the phonebook entry
Name of the phonebook entry
Name of the phonebook entry
5. Name of the phonebook entry
6. Name of the phonebook entry
281
Voice control
PHONE mode
“Please say the number in groups of
digits.”
Ping %
! “1234”
# “1234”
Ping %
$ The teleprompter is opened with the
recognized phone number (1234) in
the first line and the number speller
with some options for numbers.
“Please say the name.”
Ping %
! “Alice Jeong.”
# “Alice Jeong.
To which category do you want to add
the number. Home, mobile or work?”
“Home.
A number was already entered. Do you
want to overwrite this number?”
! “Yes.”
# “Yes.
The entry was created.”
Storing a number and creating a new
phonebook entry
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
! “Store number.”
# “Do you want to add the number to an
existing entry or create a new one?”
Ping %
! “Add to entry.”
$ The teleprompter is opened with the
phonebook picklist.
282
# Ping %
! “Store number.”
# “Store number.”
Ping %
$ A number speller is displayed for
entering the phone number.
Voice control
PHONE mode
“Please say the number in groups of
digits.”
Ping %
! “1234”
# “1234”
Ping %
$ The teleprompter is opened with the
recognized phone number (1234) in
the first line and the number speller
with some options for numbers.
! “Store number.”
# “Do you want to add the number to an
existing entry or create a new one?”
Ping %
! “New entry.”
# “New entry.
To which category do you want to add
the number. Home, mobile or work?”
“Home.
The entry was created.”
283
Voice control
Navigation mode
Calling up Navigation mode
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command
“Navigation” after the signal tone.
 Please continue at “Entering the state
or the province” on page 287 in the
section “Operating examples”.
The navigation system is called up and
the appropriate main menu appears on
the display.
Entering a city
You can use the command “Enter city” to
initiate a dialog for entering the city for a
destination.
Navigation mode help
You can use the command “Navigation
commands” to listen to all the commands
that are available for your navigation
system.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command
“Navigation commands” after the signal
tone.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Entering a destination
You have a number of options for entering
destinations using the voice control
system.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Enter
city” after the signal tone.
If no state or province has been entered
yet:
Entering state/province
You can use the command “Enter state” or
“Enter province” to initiate a dialog for
entering the state or the province for a
destination.
 Please continue at “Entering the state
or the province” on page 287 in the
section “Operating examples”.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Enter
state” or “Enter province” after the
signal tone.
284
“Enter state” or “Enter province”.
“No state or province entered yet”.
If a state or province has been entered
already:
 Please continue at “Entering the city” on
page 288 in the section “Operating
examples”.
Voice control
Navigation mode
Entering an address
You can use the command “Enter address”
to initiate a dialog for entering the address
data for a destination.
The following commands are available for
this:
See also “Entering a destination” on
page 287 in the section “Operating
examples”.
Entering a Point of Interest (POI) via the
phone number
You can use the command “Phone number
search” to initiate a dialog for entering a
POI using phone numbers internally stored
in the system.
See also “Entering Point of Interest (POI)
via the phone number” on page 289 in the
section “Operating examples”.
Entering a destination stored in the
Adress Book
“Navigate to Address Book” or
“Navigate to ...*1”
See also “Entering a destination stored
in the address book” on page 290 in the
section “Operating examples”.
“Navigate home” or “Navigate work”
See also “Entering a destination stored
in the address book” on page 290 in the
section “Operating examples”.
“Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4).”
See also “Entering a destination stored
in the address book” on page 290 in the
section “Operating examples”.
“Navigate to previous destination”
See also “Entering a destination stored
in the address book” on page 290 in the
section “Operating examples”.
Suspending route guidance
You can use the commando “Suspend
route guidance” to stop an active route
guidance session.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Suspend
route guidance” after the signal tone.
The route guidance will be suspendend.
Resuming route guidance
You can use the command “Resume route
guidance” to resume a route guidance
session.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Resume
route guidance” after the signal tone.
The route guidance will be resumed.
You likewise have a number of options for
entering destinations using a destination
stored in the Address Book.
1. Name of the address book entry
285
Voice control
Navigation mode
Muting and reactivating navigation
announcements
You can mute and reactivate the navigation
announcements using the voice control
system. The following commands are
available for this:
“Guidance voice off”
“Guidance voice on”
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The route will be redefined.
Setting a detour
You can use the following commands to set
a detour for a section of your route:
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
“Detour”
“Detour 1 mile” or “Detour 1 kilometer”
“Detour 2 miles” or “Detour 2 kilometer”
The system mutes or reactivates the
navigation announcements.
“Detour 5 miles” or “Detour 5 kilometer”
“Detour 10 miles” or “Detour 10
kilometer”
Redefining a navigation route
The following commands are available for
redefining the route for the route guidance
session:
The usage of “miles” or “kilometer” depends
on the map display setting, see section
“Map display settings” on page page 258.
“Reroute”
“Reroute shortest distance”
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
“Reroute minimize freeway”
The corresponding detour will be set.
“Reroute minimize toll road”
“Reroute shortest time”
286
Map display
Calling up the map display
The map display is called up using the
command “Display map”.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Display
map” after the signal tone.
You will see the map.
After calling up the map, you have various
options for adapting it to the current
conditions using the voice control system.
Zooming in/zooming out step by step
You can use the commands “Map zoom in”
and “Map zoom out” to set the desired map
scale step by step.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The map will be zoomed to the next
map scale.
Voice control
Navigation mode
Zooming to maximum/minimum
You can use the commands “Map zoom
maximum” or “Map zoom minimum” to
zoom the map to the corresponding scale.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The map will be zoomed accordingly.
Zooming to the entire route
You can use the command “Display route”
to show the map display with the entire
calculated route and the Options menu.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Display
route” after the signal tone.
You will see the map display with the
entire calculated route and the Options
menu.
Setting the map orientation
You can use the commands “Map north up”
or “Map heading up” to orient the map
either to the north or the direction of travel.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
The map orientation changes
accordingly.
Switching traffic information on/off
You can use the commands “Traffic
Information On” or “Traffic Information Off”
to switch displaying of traffic information on
or off.
Entering the state or the province
“Please say the state or province
name.”
Ping %
! “Michigan”
# “Michigan”
$ The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the state or province.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the desired command
after the signal tone.
Operating examples
Entering a destination
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Enter address.”
# “Enter address.”
! “Michigan”
# “Michigan”
287
Voice control
Navigation mode
Entering the city
“Please say the city name.”
Ping %
# “Reuther RD”
$ The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the road.
! “Westland”
# “Westland”
$ The first page of a picklist is displayed
If house numbers are available:
You can enter a house number, see below.
Entering the house number
“Please say individual numbers from 0
to 9”
$ A number speller is displayed for
for selecting the city.
entering the house number.
! “Reuther RD”
# “Reuther RD”
If no house numbers are available:
! “Westland”
# “Westland”
Entering the street
! “Yes.”
“Please say the street name.”
Ping %
! “Reuther RD”
288
“Do you want to start the route
guidance to ...*?”
Ping %
The navigation system uses the
address as the destination and starts
route guidance.
“Please say the number in groups of
digits.”
Ping %
! “78”
Voice control
Navigation mode
“78”
Ping %
$ A number speller is displayed with the
recognized house number (78) in the
first line.
Entering Point of Interest (POI) via the
phone number
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
$ A number speller is displayed with the
# Ping %
! “Phone number search.”
# “Phone number search.”
$ A number speller is displayed for
“123.”
Ping %
first part of the recognized phone
number (123) in the first line and the
number speller with some options for
numbers.
entering the phone number.
!“Start route guidance”
“Do you want to start the route
guidance to ...*?”
Ping %
! “Yes.”
The navigation system uses the
address as the destination and starts
route guidance.
“Please say the number in groups of
digits.”
Ping %
! “123.”
! “456.”
# “456.”
Ping %
$ A number speller is displayed with the
total recognized phone number
(123456) in the first line and the
number speller with some options for
numbers.
289
Voice control
Navigation mode
Entering a destination stored in the
address book
Option 1
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Navigate to ...*1.”
# “Navigate to ...*.”
! “Start route guidance.”
$ The entered destination is shown on
the map.
“Do you want to start the route
guidance to the entered destination?”
Ping %
! “Yes.”
The navigation system uses the phone
number and the corresponding address
of the POI as the destination and starts
route guidance.
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the address of the selected
address book entry.
Option 2
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Navigate home.” or “Navigate work.”
# “Navigate home.” or “Navigate work.”
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the corresponding address.
1. Name of the address book entry
290
Option 3
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4).”
# “Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4).”
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the corresponding address.
Option 4
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Navigate to Address Book.”
# “Navigate to Address Book.”
$ The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting an Address Book entry.
Voice control
Navigation mode
# “Navigate to previous destination.”
$ The first page of a picklist is displayed
for selecting the right recent destination
name.
“Please say the name.”
Ping %
! “...*”
# “...*”
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the selected address book
entry.
Entering a destination via the “Previous
destinations”
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel.
# Ping %
! “Navigate to previous destination.”
“Please say the name.”
Ping %
! “...*”
# “...*”
# “Do you want to start the route
guidance to the entered destination?”
Ping %
! “Yes.”
The navigation system starts route
guidance to the recent destination.
291
Voice control
Various commands
Various commands help
Other available commands
You can use the command “Various
commands” to listen to the available
various commands.
Switching the display off/on
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Various
commands” after the signal tone.
The teleprompter is opened with the
possible commands.
Certain vehicle-specific information will
continue to be displayed even when the
display is switched off. Certain events or the
initiation of certain functions will also result
in corresponding displays that automatically
disappear after a certain time.
You can use the commands “Display off” or
“Display on” to switch the display off/on.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Display
off” or “Display on” after the signal tone.
The display switches off or on.
Switching the display completely off/on
Using this function, you can completely
switch off the display. In contrast to the
function “Display off”, no information will be
displayed any longer when using this
function.
You can use the commands “Front full
display off” or “Front full display on” to
switch the display off/on.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “Front full
display off” or “Front full display on”
after the signal tone.
The display switches completely off or
on again.
Switching audio/video playback off/on
With the system switched on, you can switch
audio/video playback off and on
independently. Whether audio/video
playback is switched on or off, you can
switch the system on and off without
affecting it.
The following functions are still available
when audio/video playback is switched off:
Voice control system
PHONE
Navigation
INFO
You can use the commands “AV off” or “AV
on” to switch the audio/video playback off/
on.
 Press the  button on the steering
wheel and say the command “AV off” or
“AV on” after the signal tone.
The audio/video playback will be
switched off or on.
292
Voice control
Command overview
Group commands
Tuner commands
For the help function
Mode selection commands
“Help”
“Radio”
“XM”
Station storing command
Help command
Channel commands (XM® tuner mode
only)
For the main functions
“Main menu”
For tuner mode
“Radio commands”
“Radio commands”
“Station commands”
“Frequency commands”
Wave band selection commands
For DISC and AUX mode
FM mode commands
“Media commands”
“Disc commands”
“Track commands”
“Folder commands”
“FM1”
“FM2”
For PHONE mode
“Next station”
“Previous station”
“Seek up”
“Seek down”
“Phone commands”
For Navigation mode
“Navigation commands”
“Address book commands”
“Destination search commands”
“Route guidance commands”
“Map commands”
“FM”
“AM”
Station selection commands (FM and
AM tuner mode only)
Frequency selection commands (FM/AM
tuner mode only)
“FM ...(87.7-107.9)”
“AM ...(530-1710)”
Preset selection command
“Preset...(1-16)”
“Scan”
“Next channel”
“Previous channel”
“Channel ...*”
“Channel...(1-255)”
“Channel by name”
DISC and AUX commands
Mode selection commands
“Disc”
“External device”
“iPod”
“USB”
“AUX”
Help command
“Media commands”
293
Voice control
Command overview
Disc selection commands
Help command
Destination entering commands
“Next disc”
“Previous disc”
“Disc ...(1-6)”
“Phone commands”
“Enter state”
“Enter province”
“Enter city”
“Enter address”
“Phone number search”
Folder selection commands
“Next folder”
“Previous folder”
Track selection commands
“Next track”
“Previous track”
“Track ...(1-99)”
Random function commands
“Random song”
“Random album”
Dialing commands
“Dial number”
“Redial”
“Call by name”
“Call ...*1”
“Call ...*2 Home”
“Call ...*3 Mobile”
“Call ...*4 Work”
Storing command
“Store number”
Navigation commands
Mode selection command
Address Book commands
“Navigate home”
“Navigate work”
“Navigate to favorite point ...(1-4)”
“Navigate to previous destination”
“Navigate to Address Book”
“Navigate to ...*5”
Route guidance commands
Suspending/resuming route guidance
“Navigation”
“Suspend route guidance”
“Resume route guidance”
PHONE commands
Help command
Route redefining
Mode selection command
“Navigation commands”
“Reroute”
“Reroute shortest distance”
“Reroute minimize freeway”
“Reroute minimize toll road”
“Reroute shortest time”
“Random stop”
“Bluetooth”
1.
2.
3.
4.
294
Name of the phonebook entry
Name of the phonebook entry
Name of the phonebook entry
Name of the phonebook entry
5. Name of the address book entry
Voice control
Command overview
Detour setting
Traffic information commands
“Detour”
“Detour 1 mile” or “Detour 1 kilometer”
“Detour 2 miles” or “Detour 2 kilometer”
“Detour 5 miles” or “Detour 5 kilometer”
“Detour 10 miles” or “Detour 10 kilometer”
“Traffic Information On”
“Traffic Information Off”
The usage of “miles” or “kilometer” depends
on the map display setting, see section
“Map display settings” on page page 258.
Help command
Various commands
“Various commands”
Other available commands
Navigation announcements
“Guidance voice off”
“Guidance voice on”
“Display off”
“Display on”
“Front full display off”
Map commands
“Display map”
“Map zoom in”
“Map zoom out”
“Map zoom maximum”
“Map zoom minimum”
“Display route”
“Map north up”
“Map heading up”
“Front full display on”
“AV off”
“AV on”
295
Voice control
Command overview
296
INFO
Opening the INFO main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Vehicle functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Car Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
297
INFO
Opening the INFO main menu
For information on general system
operation, please refer to the chapter
“Functional introduction” from page 17.
 Press the  button.
Either the PHONE main menu or the
INFO main menu appears.
If the PHONE main menu appears:
 Press the  button once more.
The INFO main menu appears.
INFO main menu
298
Available functions
Climate, see page 299
Vehicle Height, page 299
Suspension Info, see page 299
Car Settings, see page 300
System Settings, see page 304
INFO
Vehicle functions
Climate
Vehicle Height
Suspension Info
You can't operate anything in this menu
using the Driver Information System. You
must use the corresponding vehicle
controls. For further information, please see
the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
This function may not be available. It
depends on the vehicle equipment.
You can't operate anything in this menu
using the Driver Information System. You
must use the corresponding vehicle
controls. For further information, please see
the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
This function may not be available. It
depends on the vehicle equipment.
You can't operate anything in this menu
using the Driver Information System. You
must use the corresponding vehicle
controls. For further information, please see
the Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
 Open the INFO main menu, see section
“Opening the INFO main menu” on
page 298.
 Open the INFO main menu, see section
“Opening the INFO main menu” on
page 298.
 In the INFO main menu, select the
menu item Vehicle Height.
 In the INFO main menu, select the
menu item Suspension Info.
 Open the INFO main menu, see section
“Opening the INFO main menu” on
page 298.
 In the INFO main menu, select the
menu item Climate.
You will see various information
such as the exterior temperature, the
temperature in the front seats and
the fan setting.
You will see the current vehicle height
setting.
You will see the current suspension
hardness setting.
299
INFO
Car Settings
The Car Settings may not be available. It
depends on the vehicle equipment.
 In the INFO main menu, select the
menu item Car Settings.
If the Car Settings menu is already opened
and the vehicle exceeds a certain speed,
the higlight cursor disappears and all menu
items are shown in gray color.
Opening the Car Settings menu
Opening the Car Settings menu is not
possible as soon as the vehicle exceeds a
certain speed.
As soon as the vehicle falls below a certain
speed, it will be possible again.
 Open the INFO main menu, see section
“Opening the INFO main menu” on
page 298.
Car Settings menu while the vehicle is
driving

Car Settings menu
The following functions are available:


INFO main menu
Car Settings menu item
300
Auto Door Lock, see page 301
Auto Door Unlock, see page 302
Twice Unlock, see page 303
Illustration shows the Car Settings menu
while the vehicle is standing
Door Lock Sound, see page 303

Key Activates Alarm, see page 303
Seat Easy Access, see page 303
Steering Easy Access, see page 303

Car Settings menu
Highlight cursor
INFO
Car Settings
Auto Door Lock
This function automatically locks the doors
as soon as a specific condition is met.
 Open the Car Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Car Settings
menu” on page 300.

Illustration shows the Car Settings menu
while the vehicle is driving


Car Settings menu without highlight
cursor and with menu items shown in
gray color
Since all menu items are shown in gray
color, none of them can be selected.
You can always use the  button to go
back to the next higher menu level.
Icon  for currently active setting
Options menu
 To change the setting: Select another
setting.


Car Settings menu
Auto Door Lock menu item
 In the Car Settings menu, highlight the
menu item Auto Door Lock.
 Push  the controller  once.
Off = Function is switched off.
Vehicle Speed = Doors will be
locked as soon as a specific vehicle
speed is exceeded.
Shift Lever = Doors will be locked
as a function of the shift lever
position.
The Options menu containing the
respective setting options appears.
301
INFO
Car Settings
Auto Door Unlock
All other functions
This function automatically unlocks the
doors as soon as a specific condition is met.
All other functions can only be switched on
or off; therefore, only a summarized
description is provided. The individual
functions are explained below.
 Open the Car Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Car Settings
menu” on page 300.


Icon  for currently active setting
Options menu
 To change the setting: Select another
setting.


Off = Function is switched off.
Key Removed = Doors will be

unlocked as soon as the ignition key
is removed from the key holder
(vehicles without ignition) or from
the ignition (vehicles with ignition).
 Open the Car Settings menu, see
section “Opening the Car Settings
menu” on page 300.
Shift Lever = Doors will be unlocked
as a function of the shift lever
position.
 To select a function: In the Car
Settings menu, highlight the desired
menu item.
Drivers Door = Doors will be
unlocked when the driver's door
is unlocked.
 Push  the controller  once.
Car Settings menu
Auto Door Unlock menu item
 In the Car Settings menu, highlight the
menu item Auto Door Unlock.
 Push  the controller  once.
The Options menu containing the
respective setting options appears.
302
Car Settings menu
The corresponding Options menu
containing the respective setting
options appears. The current setting is
identified by the icon .
INFO
Car Settings
 To switch the function on or off:
Select the menu item On or Off.
Twice Unlock
With the function Twice Unlock activated,
pressing the unlock button on the remote
key once unlocks the driver’s door;
pressing it twice unlocks all doors.
With the function Twice Unlock
deactivated, pressing the unlock button
unlocks also the driver’s door, but pressing
it twice has no function.
Door Lock Sound
When the function Door Lock Sound is
switched on, you will hear a signal tone
when locking or unlocking the vehicle using
the key remote.
Seat Easy Access
The function Seat Easy Access
automatically moves the driver's seat back
a little as soon as the vehicle's ignition is
switched off. When the ignition is switched
back on, the seat moves back to the
position you defined.
Steering Easy Access
The function Steering Easy Access
automatically moves the steering wheel
away from you as the vehicle's ignition is
switched off. When the vehicle's ignition is
switched on, the steering wheel moves to
the position you defined.
Key Activates Alarm
When the function Key Activates Alarm is
switched on, the vehicle alarm system will
not only be activated when locking the
doors using the key remote, but also when
locking them using the physical key.
303
INFO
System Settings
Opening the System Settings menu
Display Off
 Open the INFO main menu, see section
“Opening the INFO main menu” on
page 298.
You can switch off the display using this
function. Certain vehicle-specific
information will continue to be displayed
even when the display is switched off.
Certain events or the initiation of certain
functions will also result in corresponding
displays that automatically disappear after
a certain time.

System Settings menu
The following functions are available:


INFO main menu
System Settings menu item
 In the INFO main menu, select the
menu item System Settings.
The System Settings menu appears.
304
Switching the display off
Option 1
Display Off, see page 304
Full Display Off, see page 305
Display Dimming, see page 305
 Press and hold the rotary knob  on
the headunit until the display switches
off.
Display Brightness, see page 306
Option 2
Language, see page 307
Speed Dependent Vol., Show Voice
Commands (Teleprompter) and
Rpt. Voice Commands, see section
“All other functions” on page 307.
 Open the System Settings menu, see
section “Opening the System Settings
menu” on page 304.
INFO
System Settings
Full Display Off
Switching the display on
Using this function, you can completely
switch off the display. In contrast to the
function “Display Off”, no information will be
displayed any longer when using this
function.
 Option 2: Press one of the following
main function buttons:
Switching the display off


Display Off menu item
System Settings menu
 Open the System Settings menu, see
section “Opening the System Settings
menu” on page 304.
 In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Display Off.
 Option 2: Press one of the following
main function buttons:
 or 

 or 
 In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Full Display Off.

 Option 3: Press the  button on the
steering wheel.
 or 
 or 

 Option 3: Press the  button on the
steering wheel.
 Open the System Settings menu, see
section “Opening the System Settings
menu” on page 304.
 Option 1: Press the controller .
 or 
 or 
You can switch control of the display
dimming using this function.
Switching the display on
Display Dimming
The display switches off.
 Option 1: Press the controller .

Full Display Off menu item
System Settings menu
The display switches off.
305
INFO
System Settings
 To switch the setting: Select the other
menu item.


Display Dimming menu item
System Settings menu
 In the System Settings menu, highlight
the menu item Display Dimming.
 Push  the controller  once.
The corresponding Options menu
appears.
Auto Mode:
When the vehicle light is switched
off, the display is always at full
brightness. When the vehicle light is
switched on, the display brightness
is set to 67% of the brightness set
for day mode.
Day Mode:
When the vehicle light is switched
off, the display is always at the
brightness set for day mode.
When the vehicle light is switched
on, the display brightness is set to
90% of the brightness set for day
mode.
Please see the section “Display Brightness”
on page 306 to find out how to set the
brightness for day mode.
Display Brightness


Icon  for currently active setting
Options menu
306
You can use this function primarily to set the
display brightness for day mode. However it
also influences the display brightness in
auto mode. For further information, please
refer to the section “Display Dimming” on
page 305.
 Open the System Settings menu, see
section “Opening the System Settings
menu” on page 304.


Display Brightness menu item
System Settings menu
 In the System Settings menu, select the
menu item Display Brightness.
The Brightness Settings menu appears.
Brightness Settings menu
After the Brightness Settings menu appears,
the brightness is always switched to the
value shown in the menu, regardless of how
the display dimming is set.
After the menu is closed, the brightness is
switched back to the value corresponding to
the set display dimming.
INFO
System Settings
 Open the System Settings menu, see
section “Opening the System Settings
menu” on page 304.


Brightness Settings menu
 To set the brightness value: Turn  
the controller  until the desired
setting is reached.
 To exit the Brightness Settings
menu: Briefly press the  button.
The system saves the settings
automatically.
Language



Language menu item
Icon  for currently active setting
Options menu
 To switch the setting: Select the
desired language.
System Settings menu
 In the System Settings menu, highlight
the menu item Language.
 Push  the controller  once.
The corresponding Options menu
appears.
All other functions
All other functions can only be switched on
or off; therefore, only a summarized
description is provided. The individual
functions are explained below.
This function lets you switch the language in
the display and the language for the
navigation announcements.
The language of the voice control system is
independently from this setting. It is always
set to the English language.
307
INFO
System Settings
 Open the System Settings menu, see
section “Opening the System Settings
menu” on page 304.
Speed Dependent Vol.
When this function is switched on, the
system volume will be automatically
adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.
Show Voice Commands (Teleprompter)
The visual help of the voice control system
is called teleprompter. It shows available
voice commands, see example illustration
below.

System Settings menu
 To select a function: In the System
Settings menu, highlight the desired
menu item.
 Push  the controller  once.
The corresponding Options menu
appears. The current setting is
identified by the icon .
 To switch the function on or off:
Select the menu item On or Off.
The function will be switched on or off,
depending on the menu item selected.
308
Rpt. Voice Commands
Many commands are repeated by the voice
control system when this function is
switched on.
Rear camera*
General information and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
The asterisk * identifies optional equipment.
309
Rear camera*
General information and operation
General information
The Driver Information System is
connected to the rear camera, for the
vehicles that are equipped.
The display in the vehicle may be different
from the picture below.
The display of the Driver Information
System will switch to the front camera
view, provided that the vehicle speed is
less than 5 km/h.
Operation
The display in the vehicle may be different
from the picture below.
WARNING
The camera has a wide angle lens to obtain
wider visual field, so the actual distance may
be different from that comprehended
through the camera.
For safety, always check the front, rear, left,
and right of the vehicle.
Switching the rear/front camera view on
Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
 To switch the rear camera view on:
Switch the gear in the position of R.
The display of the Driver Information
System will switch to the rear camera
view.
310
The vehicle’s camera button has two states:
On and Off. Everytime you you press the
button, the state changes accordingly.



Red line
Yellow line
Green line
The three lines ,  and  are showing
the following distances, each measured
from the rear bumper:
Red line  = 1.64 ft (50 cm)
Yellow line  = 3.28 ft (100 cm)
Green line  = 9.84 ft (300 cm)
 To switch the front camera view on:
Switch the gear in the position of D or N.
 If the display does not show the front
camera view, press the vehicle’s
camera button.
While the rear/front camera view is shown
on the display, pressing the button  on
the steering wheel will toggle through the
available audio/video sources in the
background.
Rear camera*
General information and operation
Switching the rear/front camera view off
Switching the gear is described in detail in
the vehicle’s operation manual. Please pay
attention to the corresponding descriptions
and safety instructions in the vehicle’s
operation manual.
The rear camera view will automatically
switch off if the gear is switched to position
D and the vehicle exceeds a certain speed.
 To switch the front camera view off:
If the front monitor shows the front
camera view, press the vehicle’s
camera button.
The display will return to the normal
view.
The vehicle’s camera button has two states:
On and Off. Everytime you you press the
button, the state changes accordingly.
 To switch the rear camera view off:
While the rear camera view is
displayed, switch the gear to any
position except R and D.
The display will return to the normal
view.
Pressing one of the main function buttons
(e.g. button ) on the central control
panel may also switch the rear camera view
off.
311
Rear camera*
General information and operation
312
Appendix
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
313
Appendix
Technical data
Headunit
Radio
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Reception range FM
Double DIN
W7" x H4.1" x D7,9"
(W178 mm x H104 mm x D200.7 mm)
87.9 - 107.9 MHz, 200 kHz step
Viewing angle
Bottom side: 60°
Top side: 30°
Left and right side: 45°
Reception range AM
530 - 1710 kHz, 10 kHz step
Common
6.06 lbs (27.5 kg)
Display
Operating voltage range
Power consumption
Size (active area, W x H)
Quiescent current (Headunit in sleep
mode): 2.3 mA
6.85" x 4.11" (174 mm x 104.4 mm)
Average supply current: 2.3 A
Diagonal size
Weight
10 V - 15 V (typically 12 V)
8" (202.9 mm)
Antenna type
Number of pixels
XM® Satellite Radio and GPS:
Roof mounted antenna.
800 x 480
FM/AM: Integrated glass antenna
LCD type
Active matrix Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
using amorphous silicon thin film transistor
(TFT).
314
Temperature range for storage
-40° F - +176° F (-40° C - +80° C)
Temperature range for usage
-4° F - +149° F (-20° C - +65° C)
Operating humidity range
0 - 95%

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 317
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-14, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:54df186d-8325-497a-88cb-cf5e4ab40443
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2009:12:15 10:38:13Z
Modify Date                     : 2010:01:19 12:47:55+01:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:01:19 12:47:55+01:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document ID                     : uuid:7f417318-d408-4bfe-a70f-fe6907e9b276
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : TDietz
Title                           : 01 Cover (Hyundai-Logo).fm
Author                          : TDietz

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools